]> code.delx.au - gnu-emacs/blob - doc/lispref/display.texi
make-xwidget unused arg cleanup
[gnu-emacs] / doc / lispref / display.texi
1 @c -*- mode: texinfo; coding: utf-8 -*-
2 @c This is part of the GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual.
3 @c Copyright (C) 1990-1995, 1998-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @c See the file elisp.texi for copying conditions.
5 @node Display
6 @chapter Emacs Display
7
8 This chapter describes a number of features related to the display
9 that Emacs presents to the user.
10
11 @menu
12 * Refresh Screen:: Clearing the screen and redrawing everything on it.
13 * Forcing Redisplay:: Forcing redisplay.
14 * Truncation:: Folding or wrapping long text lines.
15 * The Echo Area:: Displaying messages at the bottom of the screen.
16 * Warnings:: Displaying warning messages for the user.
17 * Invisible Text:: Hiding part of the buffer text.
18 * Selective Display:: Hiding part of the buffer text (the old way).
19 * Temporary Displays:: Displays that go away automatically.
20 * Overlays:: Use overlays to highlight parts of the buffer.
21 * Size of Displayed Text:: How large displayed text is.
22 * Line Height:: Controlling the height of lines.
23 * Faces:: A face defines a graphics style for text characters:
24 font, colors, etc.
25 * Fringes:: Controlling window fringes.
26 * Scroll Bars:: Controlling scroll bars.
27 * Window Dividers:: Separating windows visually.
28 * Display Property:: Enabling special display features.
29 * Images:: Displaying images in Emacs buffers.
30 * Xwidgets:: Displaying native widgets in Emacs buffers.
31 * Buttons:: Adding clickable buttons to Emacs buffers.
32 * Abstract Display:: Emacs's Widget for Object Collections.
33 * Blinking:: How Emacs shows the matching open parenthesis.
34 * Character Display:: How Emacs displays individual characters.
35 * Beeping:: Audible signal to the user.
36 * Window Systems:: Which window system is being used.
37 * Bidirectional Display:: Display of bidirectional scripts, such as
38 Arabic and Farsi.
39 @end menu
40
41 @node Refresh Screen
42 @section Refreshing the Screen
43 @cindex refresh the screen
44 @cindex screen refresh
45
46 The function @code{redraw-frame} clears and redisplays the entire
47 contents of a given frame (@pxref{Frames}). This is useful if the
48 screen is corrupted.
49
50 @defun redraw-frame &optional frame
51 This function clears and redisplays frame @var{frame}. If @var{frame}
52 is omitted or nil, it redraws the selected frame.
53 @end defun
54
55 Even more powerful is @code{redraw-display}:
56
57 @deffn Command redraw-display
58 This function clears and redisplays all visible frames.
59 @end deffn
60
61 In Emacs, processing user input takes priority over redisplay. If
62 you call these functions when input is available, they don't redisplay
63 immediately, but the requested redisplay does happen
64 eventually---after all the input has been processed.
65
66 On text terminals, suspending and resuming Emacs normally also
67 refreshes the screen. Some terminal emulators record separate
68 contents for display-oriented programs such as Emacs and for ordinary
69 sequential display. If you are using such a terminal, you might want
70 to inhibit the redisplay on resumption.
71
72 @defopt no-redraw-on-reenter
73 @cindex suspend (cf. @code{no-redraw-on-reenter})
74 @cindex resume (cf. @code{no-redraw-on-reenter})
75 This variable controls whether Emacs redraws the entire screen after it
76 has been suspended and resumed. Non-@code{nil} means there is no need
77 to redraw, @code{nil} means redrawing is needed. The default is @code{nil}.
78 @end defopt
79
80 @node Forcing Redisplay
81 @section Forcing Redisplay
82 @cindex forcing redisplay
83
84 Emacs normally tries to redisplay the screen whenever it waits for
85 input. With the following function, you can request an immediate
86 attempt to redisplay, in the middle of Lisp code, without actually
87 waiting for input.
88
89 @defun redisplay &optional force
90 This function tries immediately to redisplay. The optional argument
91 @var{force}, if non-@code{nil}, forces the redisplay to be performed,
92 instead of being preempted if input is pending.
93
94 The function returns @code{t} if it actually tried to redisplay, and
95 @code{nil} otherwise. A value of @code{t} does not mean that
96 redisplay proceeded to completion; it could have been preempted by
97 newly arriving input.
98 @end defun
99
100 Although @code{redisplay} tries immediately to redisplay, it does
101 not change how Emacs decides which parts of its frame(s) to redisplay.
102 By contrast, the following function adds certain windows to the
103 pending redisplay work (as if their contents had completely changed),
104 but does not immediately try to perform redisplay.
105
106 @defun force-window-update &optional object
107 This function forces some or all windows to be updated the next time
108 Emacs does a redisplay. If @var{object} is a window, that window is
109 to be updated. If @var{object} is a buffer or buffer name, all
110 windows displaying that buffer are to be updated. If @var{object} is
111 @code{nil} (or omitted), all windows are to be updated.
112
113 This function does not do a redisplay immediately; Emacs does that as
114 it waits for input, or when the function @code{redisplay} is called.
115 @end defun
116
117 @defvar pre-redisplay-function
118 A function run just before redisplay. It is called with one argument,
119 the set of windows to be redisplayed. The set can be @code{nil},
120 meaning only the selected window, or @code{t}, meaning all the
121 windows.
122 @end defvar
123
124 @defvar pre-redisplay-functions
125 This hook is run just before redisplay. It is called once in each
126 window that is about to be redisplayed, with @code{current-buffer} set
127 to the buffer displayed in that window.
128 @end defvar
129
130 @node Truncation
131 @section Truncation
132 @cindex line wrapping
133 @cindex line truncation
134 @cindex continuation lines
135 @cindex @samp{$} in display
136 @cindex @samp{\} in display
137
138 When a line of text extends beyond the right edge of a window, Emacs
139 can @dfn{continue} the line (make it wrap to the next screen
140 line), or @dfn{truncate} the line (limit it to one screen line). The
141 additional screen lines used to display a long text line are called
142 @dfn{continuation} lines. Continuation is not the same as filling;
143 continuation happens on the screen only, not in the buffer contents,
144 and it breaks a line precisely at the right margin, not at a word
145 boundary. @xref{Filling}.
146
147 On a graphical display, tiny arrow images in the window fringes
148 indicate truncated and continued lines (@pxref{Fringes}). On a text
149 terminal, a @samp{$} in the rightmost column of the window indicates
150 truncation; a @samp{\} on the rightmost column indicates a line that
151 wraps. (The display table can specify alternate characters to use
152 for this; @pxref{Display Tables}).
153
154 @defopt truncate-lines
155 If this buffer-local variable is non-@code{nil}, lines that extend
156 beyond the right edge of the window are truncated; otherwise, they are
157 continued. As a special exception, the variable
158 @code{truncate-partial-width-windows} takes precedence in
159 @dfn{partial-width} windows (i.e., windows that do not occupy the
160 entire frame width).
161 @end defopt
162
163 @defopt truncate-partial-width-windows
164 @cindex partial-width windows
165 This variable controls line truncation in @dfn{partial-width} windows.
166 A partial-width window is one that does not occupy the entire frame
167 width (@pxref{Splitting Windows}). If the value is @code{nil}, line
168 truncation is determined by the variable @code{truncate-lines} (see
169 above). If the value is an integer @var{n}, lines are truncated if
170 the partial-width window has fewer than @var{n} columns, regardless of
171 the value of @code{truncate-lines}; if the partial-width window has
172 @var{n} or more columns, line truncation is determined by
173 @code{truncate-lines}. For any other non-@code{nil} value, lines are
174 truncated in every partial-width window, regardless of the value of
175 @code{truncate-lines}.
176 @end defopt
177
178 When horizontal scrolling (@pxref{Horizontal Scrolling}) is in use in
179 a window, that forces truncation.
180
181 @defvar wrap-prefix
182 If this buffer-local variable is non-@code{nil}, it defines a
183 @dfn{wrap prefix} which Emacs displays at the start of every
184 continuation line. (If lines are truncated, @code{wrap-prefix} is
185 never used.) Its value may be a string or an image (@pxref{Other
186 Display Specs}), or a stretch of whitespace such as specified by the
187 @code{:width} or @code{:align-to} display properties (@pxref{Specified
188 Space}). The value is interpreted in the same way as a @code{display}
189 text property. @xref{Display Property}.
190
191 A wrap prefix may also be specified for regions of text, using the
192 @code{wrap-prefix} text or overlay property. This takes precedence
193 over the @code{wrap-prefix} variable. @xref{Special Properties}.
194 @end defvar
195
196 @defvar line-prefix
197 If this buffer-local variable is non-@code{nil}, it defines a
198 @dfn{line prefix} which Emacs displays at the start of every
199 non-continuation line. Its value may be a string or an image
200 (@pxref{Other Display Specs}), or a stretch of whitespace such as
201 specified by the @code{:width} or @code{:align-to} display properties
202 (@pxref{Specified Space}). The value is interpreted in the same way
203 as a @code{display} text property. @xref{Display Property}.
204
205 A line prefix may also be specified for regions of text using the
206 @code{line-prefix} text or overlay property. This takes precedence
207 over the @code{line-prefix} variable. @xref{Special Properties}.
208 @end defvar
209
210 @ignore
211 If your buffer contains only very short lines, you might find it
212 advisable to set @code{cache-long-scans} to @code{nil}.
213
214 @defvar cache-long-scans
215 If this variable is non-@code{nil} (the default), various indentation
216 and motion functions, and Emacs redisplay, cache the results of
217 scanning the buffer, and consult the cache to avoid rescanning regions
218 of the buffer unless they are modified.
219
220 Turning off the cache speeds up processing of short lines somewhat.
221
222 This variable is automatically buffer-local in every buffer.
223 @end defvar
224 @end ignore
225
226 @node The Echo Area
227 @section The Echo Area
228 @cindex error display
229 @cindex echo area
230
231 @c FIXME: Why not use @xref{Minibuffers} directly? --xfq
232 The @dfn{echo area} is used for displaying error messages
233 (@pxref{Errors}), for messages made with the @code{message} primitive,
234 and for echoing keystrokes. It is not the same as the minibuffer,
235 despite the fact that the minibuffer appears (when active) in the same
236 place on the screen as the echo area. @xref{Minibuffer,, The
237 Minibuffer, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
238
239 Apart from the functions documented in this section, you can print
240 Lisp objects to the echo area by specifying @code{t} as the output
241 stream. @xref{Output Streams}.
242
243 @menu
244 * Displaying Messages:: Explicitly displaying text in the echo area.
245 * Progress:: Informing user about progress of a long operation.
246 * Logging Messages:: Echo area messages are logged for the user.
247 * Echo Area Customization:: Controlling the echo area.
248 @end menu
249
250 @node Displaying Messages
251 @subsection Displaying Messages in the Echo Area
252 @cindex display message in echo area
253
254 This section describes the standard functions for displaying
255 messages in the echo area.
256
257 @defun message format-string &rest arguments
258 This function displays a message in the echo area.
259 @var{format-string} is a format string, and @var{arguments} are the
260 objects for its format specifications, like in the @code{format-message}
261 function (@pxref{Formatting Strings}). The resulting formatted string
262 is displayed in the echo area; if it contains @code{face} text
263 properties, it is displayed with the specified faces (@pxref{Faces}).
264 The string is also added to the @file{*Messages*} buffer, but without
265 text properties (@pxref{Logging Messages}).
266
267 In a format string containing single quotes, curved quotes @t{‘like
268 this’} and grave quotes @t{`like this'} work better than straight
269 quotes @t{'like this'}, as @code{message} typically formats every
270 straight quote as a curved closing quote.
271
272 In batch mode, the message is printed to the standard error stream,
273 followed by a newline.
274
275 When @code{inhibit-message} is non-@code{nil}, no message will be displayed
276 in the echo area, it will only be logged to @samp{*Messages*}.
277
278 If @var{format-string} is @code{nil} or the empty string,
279 @code{message} clears the echo area; if the echo area has been
280 expanded automatically, this brings it back to its normal size. If
281 the minibuffer is active, this brings the minibuffer contents back
282 onto the screen immediately.
283
284 @example
285 @group
286 (message "Reverting `%s'..." (buffer-name))
287 @print{} Reverting ‘subr.el’...
288 @result{} "Reverting ‘subr.el’..."
289 @end group
290
291 @group
292 ---------- Echo Area ----------
293 Reverting ‘subr.el’...
294 ---------- Echo Area ----------
295 @end group
296 @end example
297
298 To automatically display a message in the echo area or in a pop-buffer,
299 depending on its size, use @code{display-message-or-buffer} (see below).
300
301 @strong{Warning:} If you want to use your own string as a message
302 verbatim, don't just write @code{(message @var{string})}. If
303 @var{string} contains @samp{%}, @samp{`}, or @samp{'} it may be
304 reformatted, with undesirable results. Instead, use @code{(message
305 "%s" @var{string})}.
306 @end defun
307
308 @defvar inhibit-message
309 When this variable is non-@code{nil}, @code{message} and related functions
310 will not use the Echo Area to display messages.
311 @end defvar
312
313 @defmac with-temp-message message &rest body
314 This construct displays a message in the echo area temporarily, during
315 the execution of @var{body}. It displays @var{message}, executes
316 @var{body}, then returns the value of the last body form while restoring
317 the previous echo area contents.
318 @end defmac
319
320 @defun message-or-box format-string &rest arguments
321 This function displays a message like @code{message}, but may display it
322 in a dialog box instead of the echo area. If this function is called in
323 a command that was invoked using the mouse---more precisely, if
324 @code{last-nonmenu-event} (@pxref{Command Loop Info}) is either
325 @code{nil} or a list---then it uses a dialog box or pop-up menu to
326 display the message. Otherwise, it uses the echo area. (This is the
327 same criterion that @code{y-or-n-p} uses to make a similar decision; see
328 @ref{Yes-or-No Queries}.)
329
330 You can force use of the mouse or of the echo area by binding
331 @code{last-nonmenu-event} to a suitable value around the call.
332 @end defun
333
334 @defun message-box format-string &rest arguments
335 @anchor{message-box}
336 This function displays a message like @code{message}, but uses a dialog
337 box (or a pop-up menu) whenever that is possible. If it is impossible
338 to use a dialog box or pop-up menu, because the terminal does not
339 support them, then @code{message-box} uses the echo area, like
340 @code{message}.
341 @end defun
342
343 @defun display-message-or-buffer message &optional buffer-name action frame
344 This function displays the message @var{message}, which may be either a
345 string or a buffer. If it is shorter than the maximum height of the
346 echo area, as defined by @code{max-mini-window-height}, it is displayed
347 in the echo area, using @code{message}. Otherwise,
348 @code{display-buffer} is used to show it in a pop-up buffer.
349
350 Returns either the string shown in the echo area, or when a pop-up
351 buffer is used, the window used to display it.
352
353 If @var{message} is a string, then the optional argument
354 @var{buffer-name} is the name of the buffer used to display it when a
355 pop-up buffer is used, defaulting to @file{*Message*}. In the case
356 where @var{message} is a string and displayed in the echo area, it is
357 not specified whether the contents are inserted into the buffer anyway.
358
359 The optional arguments @var{action} and @var{frame} are as for
360 @code{display-buffer}, and only used if a buffer is displayed.
361 @end defun
362
363 @defun current-message
364 This function returns the message currently being displayed in the
365 echo area, or @code{nil} if there is none.
366 @end defun
367
368 @node Progress
369 @subsection Reporting Operation Progress
370 @cindex progress reporting
371
372 When an operation can take a while to finish, you should inform the
373 user about the progress it makes. This way the user can estimate
374 remaining time and clearly see that Emacs is busy working, not hung.
375 A convenient way to do this is to use a @dfn{progress reporter}.
376
377 Here is a working example that does nothing useful:
378
379 @smallexample
380 (let ((progress-reporter
381 (make-progress-reporter "Collecting mana for Emacs..."
382 0 500)))
383 (dotimes (k 500)
384 (sit-for 0.01)
385 (progress-reporter-update progress-reporter k))
386 (progress-reporter-done progress-reporter))
387 @end smallexample
388
389 @defun make-progress-reporter message &optional min-value max-value current-value min-change min-time
390 This function creates and returns a progress reporter object, which
391 you will use as an argument for the other functions listed below. The
392 idea is to precompute as much data as possible to make progress
393 reporting very fast.
394
395 When this progress reporter is subsequently used, it will display
396 @var{message} in the echo area, followed by progress percentage.
397 @var{message} is treated as a simple string. If you need it to depend
398 on a filename, for instance, use @code{format-message} before calling this
399 function.
400
401 The arguments @var{min-value} and @var{max-value} should be numbers
402 standing for the starting and final states of the operation. For
403 instance, an operation that scans a buffer should set these to the
404 results of @code{point-min} and @code{point-max} correspondingly.
405 @var{max-value} should be greater than @var{min-value}.
406
407 Alternatively, you can set @var{min-value} and @var{max-value} to
408 @code{nil}. In that case, the progress reporter does not report
409 process percentages; it instead displays a ``spinner'' that rotates a
410 notch each time you update the progress reporter.
411
412 If @var{min-value} and @var{max-value} are numbers, you can give the
413 argument @var{current-value} a numerical value specifying the initial
414 progress; if omitted, this defaults to @var{min-value}.
415
416 The remaining arguments control the rate of echo area updates. The
417 progress reporter will wait for at least @var{min-change} more
418 percents of the operation to be completed before printing next
419 message; the default is one percent. @var{min-time} specifies the
420 minimum time in seconds to pass between successive prints; the default
421 is 0.2 seconds. (On some operating systems, the progress reporter may
422 handle fractions of seconds with varying precision).
423
424 This function calls @code{progress-reporter-update}, so the first
425 message is printed immediately.
426 @end defun
427
428 @defun progress-reporter-update reporter &optional value
429 This function does the main work of reporting progress of your
430 operation. It displays the message of @var{reporter}, followed by
431 progress percentage determined by @var{value}. If percentage is zero,
432 or close enough according to the @var{min-change} and @var{min-time}
433 arguments, then it is omitted from the output.
434
435 @var{reporter} must be the result of a call to
436 @code{make-progress-reporter}. @var{value} specifies the current
437 state of your operation and must be between @var{min-value} and
438 @var{max-value} (inclusive) as passed to
439 @code{make-progress-reporter}. For instance, if you scan a buffer,
440 then @var{value} should be the result of a call to @code{point}.
441
442 This function respects @var{min-change} and @var{min-time} as passed
443 to @code{make-progress-reporter} and so does not output new messages
444 on every invocation. It is thus very fast and normally you should not
445 try to reduce the number of calls to it: resulting overhead will most
446 likely negate your effort.
447 @end defun
448
449 @defun progress-reporter-force-update reporter &optional value new-message
450 This function is similar to @code{progress-reporter-update} except
451 that it prints a message in the echo area unconditionally.
452
453 The first two arguments have the same meaning as for
454 @code{progress-reporter-update}. Optional @var{new-message} allows
455 you to change the message of the @var{reporter}. Since this function
456 always updates the echo area, such a change will be immediately
457 presented to the user.
458 @end defun
459
460 @defun progress-reporter-done reporter
461 This function should be called when the operation is finished. It
462 prints the message of @var{reporter} followed by word @samp{done} in the
463 echo area.
464
465 You should always call this function and not hope for
466 @code{progress-reporter-update} to print @samp{100%}. Firstly, it may
467 never print it, there are many good reasons for this not to happen.
468 Secondly, @samp{done} is more explicit.
469 @end defun
470
471 @defmac dotimes-with-progress-reporter (var count [result]) message body@dots{}
472 This is a convenience macro that works the same way as @code{dotimes}
473 does, but also reports loop progress using the functions described
474 above. It allows you to save some typing.
475
476 You can rewrite the example in the beginning of this node using
477 this macro this way:
478
479 @example
480 (dotimes-with-progress-reporter
481 (k 500)
482 "Collecting some mana for Emacs..."
483 (sit-for 0.01))
484 @end example
485 @end defmac
486
487 @node Logging Messages
488 @subsection Logging Messages in @file{*Messages*}
489 @cindex logging echo-area messages
490
491 Almost all the messages displayed in the echo area are also recorded
492 in the @file{*Messages*} buffer so that the user can refer back to
493 them. This includes all the messages that are output with
494 @code{message}. By default, this buffer is read-only and uses the major
495 mode @code{messages-buffer-mode}. Nothing prevents the user from
496 killing the @file{*Messages*} buffer, but the next display of a message
497 recreates it. Any Lisp code that needs to access the
498 @file{*Messages*} buffer directly and wants to ensure that it exists
499 should use the function @code{messages-buffer}.
500
501 @defun messages-buffer
502 This function returns the @file{*Messages*} buffer. If it does not
503 exist, it creates it, and switches it to @code{messages-buffer-mode}.
504 @end defun
505
506 @defopt message-log-max
507 This variable specifies how many lines to keep in the @file{*Messages*}
508 buffer. The value @code{t} means there is no limit on how many lines to
509 keep. The value @code{nil} disables message logging entirely. Here's
510 how to display a message and prevent it from being logged:
511
512 @example
513 (let (message-log-max)
514 (message @dots{}))
515 @end example
516 @end defopt
517
518 To make @file{*Messages*} more convenient for the user, the logging
519 facility combines successive identical messages. It also combines
520 successive related messages for the sake of two cases: question
521 followed by answer, and a series of progress messages.
522
523 A question followed by an answer has two messages like the
524 ones produced by @code{y-or-n-p}: the first is @samp{@var{question}},
525 and the second is @samp{@var{question}...@var{answer}}. The first
526 message conveys no additional information beyond what's in the second,
527 so logging the second message discards the first from the log.
528
529 A series of progress messages has successive messages like
530 those produced by @code{make-progress-reporter}. They have the form
531 @samp{@var{base}...@var{how-far}}, where @var{base} is the same each
532 time, while @var{how-far} varies. Logging each message in the series
533 discards the previous one, provided they are consecutive.
534
535 The functions @code{make-progress-reporter} and @code{y-or-n-p}
536 don't have to do anything special to activate the message log
537 combination feature. It operates whenever two consecutive messages
538 are logged that share a common prefix ending in @samp{...}.
539
540 @node Echo Area Customization
541 @subsection Echo Area Customization
542 @cindex echo area customization
543
544 These variables control details of how the echo area works.
545
546 @defvar cursor-in-echo-area
547 This variable controls where the cursor appears when a message is
548 displayed in the echo area. If it is non-@code{nil}, then the cursor
549 appears at the end of the message. Otherwise, the cursor appears at
550 point---not in the echo area at all.
551
552 The value is normally @code{nil}; Lisp programs bind it to @code{t}
553 for brief periods of time.
554 @end defvar
555
556 @defvar echo-area-clear-hook
557 This normal hook is run whenever the echo area is cleared---either by
558 @code{(message nil)} or for any other reason.
559 @end defvar
560
561 @defopt echo-keystrokes
562 This variable determines how much time should elapse before command
563 characters echo. Its value must be a number, and specifies the
564 number of seconds to wait before echoing. If the user types a prefix
565 key (such as @kbd{C-x}) and then delays this many seconds before
566 continuing, the prefix key is echoed in the echo area. (Once echoing
567 begins in a key sequence, all subsequent characters in the same key
568 sequence are echoed immediately.)
569
570 If the value is zero, then command input is not echoed.
571 @end defopt
572
573 @defvar message-truncate-lines
574 Normally, displaying a long message resizes the echo area to display
575 the entire message. But if the variable @code{message-truncate-lines}
576 is non-@code{nil}, the echo area does not resize, and the message is
577 truncated to fit it.
578 @end defvar
579
580 The variable @code{max-mini-window-height}, which specifies the
581 maximum height for resizing minibuffer windows, also applies to the
582 echo area (which is really a special use of the minibuffer window;
583 @pxref{Minibuffer Misc}).
584
585 @node Warnings
586 @section Reporting Warnings
587 @cindex warnings
588
589 @dfn{Warnings} are a facility for a program to inform the user of a
590 possible problem, but continue running.
591
592 @menu
593 * Warning Basics:: Warnings concepts and functions to report them.
594 * Warning Variables:: Variables programs bind to customize their warnings.
595 * Warning Options:: Variables users set to control display of warnings.
596 * Delayed Warnings:: Deferring a warning until the end of a command.
597 @end menu
598
599 @node Warning Basics
600 @subsection Warning Basics
601 @cindex severity level
602
603 Every warning has a textual message, which explains the problem for
604 the user, and a @dfn{severity level} which is a symbol. Here are the
605 possible severity levels, in order of decreasing severity, and their
606 meanings:
607
608 @table @code
609 @item :emergency
610 A problem that will seriously impair Emacs operation soon
611 if you do not attend to it promptly.
612 @item :error
613 A report of data or circumstances that are inherently wrong.
614 @item :warning
615 A report of data or circumstances that are not inherently wrong, but
616 raise suspicion of a possible problem.
617 @item :debug
618 A report of information that may be useful if you are debugging.
619 @end table
620
621 When your program encounters invalid input data, it can either
622 signal a Lisp error by calling @code{error} or @code{signal} or report
623 a warning with severity @code{:error}. Signaling a Lisp error is the
624 easiest thing to do, but it means the program cannot continue
625 processing. If you want to take the trouble to implement a way to
626 continue processing despite the bad data, then reporting a warning of
627 severity @code{:error} is the right way to inform the user of the
628 problem. For instance, the Emacs Lisp byte compiler can report an
629 error that way and continue compiling other functions. (If the
630 program signals a Lisp error and then handles it with
631 @code{condition-case}, the user won't see the error message; it could
632 show the message to the user by reporting it as a warning.)
633
634 @c FIXME: Why use "(bytecomp)" instead of "'bytecomp" or simply
635 @c "bytecomp" here? The parens are part of warning-type-format but
636 @c not part of the warning type. --xfq
637 @cindex warning type
638 Each warning has a @dfn{warning type} to classify it. The type is a
639 list of symbols. The first symbol should be the custom group that you
640 use for the program's user options. For example, byte compiler
641 warnings use the warning type @code{(bytecomp)}. You can also
642 subcategorize the warnings, if you wish, by using more symbols in the
643 list.
644
645 @defun display-warning type message &optional level buffer-name
646 This function reports a warning, using @var{message} as the message
647 and @var{type} as the warning type. @var{level} should be the
648 severity level, with @code{:warning} being the default.
649
650 @var{buffer-name}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the name of the buffer
651 for logging the warning. By default, it is @file{*Warnings*}.
652 @end defun
653
654 @defun lwarn type level message &rest args
655 This function reports a warning using the value of @code{(format-message
656 @var{message} @var{args}...)} as the message in the @file{*Warnings*}
657 buffer. In other respects it is equivalent to @code{display-warning}.
658 @end defun
659
660 @defun warn message &rest args
661 This function reports a warning using the value of @code{(format-message
662 @var{message} @var{args}...)} as the message, @code{(emacs)} as the
663 type, and @code{:warning} as the severity level. It exists for
664 compatibility only; we recommend not using it, because you should
665 specify a specific warning type.
666 @end defun
667
668 @node Warning Variables
669 @subsection Warning Variables
670 @cindex warning variables
671
672 Programs can customize how their warnings appear by binding
673 the variables described in this section.
674
675 @defvar warning-levels
676 This list defines the meaning and severity order of the warning
677 severity levels. Each element defines one severity level,
678 and they are arranged in order of decreasing severity.
679
680 Each element has the form @code{(@var{level} @var{string}
681 @var{function})}, where @var{level} is the severity level it defines.
682 @var{string} specifies the textual description of this level.
683 @var{string} should use @samp{%s} to specify where to put the warning
684 type information, or it can omit the @samp{%s} so as not to include
685 that information.
686
687 The optional @var{function}, if non-@code{nil}, is a function to call
688 with no arguments, to get the user's attention.
689
690 Normally you should not change the value of this variable.
691 @end defvar
692
693 @defvar warning-prefix-function
694 If non-@code{nil}, the value is a function to generate prefix text for
695 warnings. Programs can bind the variable to a suitable function.
696 @code{display-warning} calls this function with the warnings buffer
697 current, and the function can insert text in it. That text becomes
698 the beginning of the warning message.
699
700 The function is called with two arguments, the severity level and its
701 entry in @code{warning-levels}. It should return a list to use as the
702 entry (this value need not be an actual member of
703 @code{warning-levels}). By constructing this value, the function can
704 change the severity of the warning, or specify different handling for
705 a given severity level.
706
707 If the variable's value is @code{nil} then there is no function
708 to call.
709 @end defvar
710
711 @defvar warning-series
712 Programs can bind this variable to @code{t} to say that the next
713 warning should begin a series. When several warnings form a series,
714 that means to leave point on the first warning of the series, rather
715 than keep moving it for each warning so that it appears on the last one.
716 The series ends when the local binding is unbound and
717 @code{warning-series} becomes @code{nil} again.
718
719 The value can also be a symbol with a function definition. That is
720 equivalent to @code{t}, except that the next warning will also call
721 the function with no arguments with the warnings buffer current. The
722 function can insert text which will serve as a header for the series
723 of warnings.
724
725 Once a series has begun, the value is a marker which points to the
726 buffer position in the warnings buffer of the start of the series.
727
728 The variable's normal value is @code{nil}, which means to handle
729 each warning separately.
730 @end defvar
731
732 @defvar warning-fill-prefix
733 When this variable is non-@code{nil}, it specifies a fill prefix to
734 use for filling each warning's text.
735 @end defvar
736
737 @defvar warning-type-format
738 This variable specifies the format for displaying the warning type
739 in the warning message. The result of formatting the type this way
740 gets included in the message under the control of the string in the
741 entry in @code{warning-levels}. The default value is @code{" (%s)"}.
742 If you bind it to @code{""} then the warning type won't appear at
743 all.
744 @end defvar
745
746 @node Warning Options
747 @subsection Warning Options
748 @cindex warning options
749
750 These variables are used by users to control what happens
751 when a Lisp program reports a warning.
752
753 @defopt warning-minimum-level
754 This user option specifies the minimum severity level that should be
755 shown immediately to the user. The default is @code{:warning}, which
756 means to immediately display all warnings except @code{:debug}
757 warnings.
758 @end defopt
759
760 @defopt warning-minimum-log-level
761 This user option specifies the minimum severity level that should be
762 logged in the warnings buffer. The default is @code{:warning}, which
763 means to log all warnings except @code{:debug} warnings.
764 @end defopt
765
766 @defopt warning-suppress-types
767 This list specifies which warning types should not be displayed
768 immediately for the user. Each element of the list should be a list
769 of symbols. If its elements match the first elements in a warning
770 type, then that warning is not displayed immediately.
771 @end defopt
772
773 @defopt warning-suppress-log-types
774 This list specifies which warning types should not be logged in the
775 warnings buffer. Each element of the list should be a list of
776 symbols. If it matches the first few elements in a warning type, then
777 that warning is not logged.
778 @end defopt
779
780 @node Delayed Warnings
781 @subsection Delayed Warnings
782 @cindex delayed warnings
783
784 Sometimes, you may wish to avoid showing a warning while a command is
785 running, and only show it only after the end of the command. You can
786 use the variable @code{delayed-warnings-list} for this.
787
788 @defvar delayed-warnings-list
789 The value of this variable is a list of warnings to be displayed after
790 the current command has finished. Each element must be a list
791
792 @smallexample
793 (@var{type} @var{message} [@var{level} [@var{buffer-name}]])
794 @end smallexample
795
796 @noindent
797 with the same form, and the same meanings, as the argument list of
798 @code{display-warning} (@pxref{Warning Basics}). Immediately after
799 running @code{post-command-hook} (@pxref{Command Overview}), the Emacs
800 command loop displays all the warnings specified by this variable,
801 then resets it to @code{nil}.
802 @end defvar
803
804 Programs which need to further customize the delayed warnings
805 mechanism can change the variable @code{delayed-warnings-hook}:
806
807 @defvar delayed-warnings-hook
808 This is a normal hook which is run by the Emacs command loop, after
809 @code{post-command-hook}, in order to to process and display delayed
810 warnings.
811
812 Its default value is a list of two functions:
813
814 @smallexample
815 (collapse-delayed-warnings display-delayed-warnings)
816 @end smallexample
817
818 @findex collapse-delayed-warnings
819 @findex display-delayed-warnings
820 @noindent
821 The function @code{collapse-delayed-warnings} removes repeated entries
822 from @code{delayed-warnings-list}. The function
823 @code{display-delayed-warnings} calls @code{display-warning} on each
824 of the entries in @code{delayed-warnings-list}, in turn, and then sets
825 @code{delayed-warnings-list} to @code{nil}.
826 @end defvar
827
828 @node Invisible Text
829 @section Invisible Text
830
831 @cindex invisible text
832 You can make characters @dfn{invisible}, so that they do not appear on
833 the screen, with the @code{invisible} property. This can be either a
834 text property (@pxref{Text Properties}) or an overlay property
835 (@pxref{Overlays}). Cursor motion also partly ignores these
836 characters; if the command loop finds that point is inside a range of
837 invisible text after a command, it relocates point to the other side
838 of the text.
839
840 In the simplest case, any non-@code{nil} @code{invisible} property makes
841 a character invisible. This is the default case---if you don't alter
842 the default value of @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}, this is how the
843 @code{invisible} property works. You should normally use @code{t}
844 as the value of the @code{invisible} property if you don't plan
845 to set @code{buffer-invisibility-spec} yourself.
846
847 More generally, you can use the variable @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}
848 to control which values of the @code{invisible} property make text
849 invisible. This permits you to classify the text into different subsets
850 in advance, by giving them different @code{invisible} values, and
851 subsequently make various subsets visible or invisible by changing the
852 value of @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}.
853
854 Controlling visibility with @code{buffer-invisibility-spec} is
855 especially useful in a program to display the list of entries in a
856 database. It permits the implementation of convenient filtering
857 commands to view just a part of the entries in the database. Setting
858 this variable is very fast, much faster than scanning all the text in
859 the buffer looking for properties to change.
860
861 @defvar buffer-invisibility-spec
862 This variable specifies which kinds of @code{invisible} properties
863 actually make a character invisible. Setting this variable makes it
864 buffer-local.
865
866 @table @asis
867 @item @code{t}
868 A character is invisible if its @code{invisible} property is
869 non-@code{nil}. This is the default.
870
871 @item a list
872 Each element of the list specifies a criterion for invisibility; if a
873 character's @code{invisible} property fits any one of these criteria,
874 the character is invisible. The list can have two kinds of elements:
875
876 @table @code
877 @item @var{atom}
878 A character is invisible if its @code{invisible} property value is
879 @var{atom} or if it is a list with @var{atom} as a member; comparison
880 is done with @code{eq}.
881
882 @item (@var{atom} . t)
883 A character is invisible if its @code{invisible} property value is
884 @var{atom} or if it is a list with @var{atom} as a member; comparison
885 is done with @code{eq}. Moreover, a sequence of such characters
886 displays as an ellipsis.
887 @end table
888 @end table
889 @end defvar
890
891 Two functions are specifically provided for adding elements to
892 @code{buffer-invisibility-spec} and removing elements from it.
893
894 @defun add-to-invisibility-spec element
895 This function adds the element @var{element} to
896 @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}. If @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}
897 was @code{t}, it changes to a list, @code{(t)}, so that text whose
898 @code{invisible} property is @code{t} remains invisible.
899 @end defun
900
901 @defun remove-from-invisibility-spec element
902 This removes the element @var{element} from
903 @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}. This does nothing if @var{element}
904 is not in the list.
905 @end defun
906
907 A convention for use of @code{buffer-invisibility-spec} is that a
908 major mode should use the mode's own name as an element of
909 @code{buffer-invisibility-spec} and as the value of the
910 @code{invisible} property:
911
912 @example
913 ;; @r{If you want to display an ellipsis:}
914 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
915 ;; @r{If you don't want ellipsis:}
916 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
917
918 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end)
919 'invisible 'my-symbol)
920
921 ;; @r{When done with the invisibility:}
922 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
923 ;; @r{Or respectively:}
924 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
925 @end example
926
927 You can check for invisibility using the following function:
928
929 @defun invisible-p pos-or-prop
930 If @var{pos-or-prop} is a marker or number, this function returns a
931 non-@code{nil} value if the text at that position is invisible.
932
933 If @var{pos-or-prop} is any other kind of Lisp object, that is taken
934 to mean a possible value of the @code{invisible} text or overlay
935 property. In that case, this function returns a non-@code{nil} value
936 if that value would cause text to become invisible, based on the
937 current value of @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}.
938 @end defun
939
940 @vindex line-move-ignore-invisible
941 Ordinarily, functions that operate on text or move point do not care
942 whether the text is invisible, they process invisible characters and
943 visible characters alike. The user-level line motion commands,
944 such as @code{next-line}, @code{previous-line}, ignore invisible
945 newlines if @code{line-move-ignore-invisible} is non-@code{nil} (the
946 default), i.e., behave like these invisible newlines didn't exist in
947 the buffer, but only because they are explicitly programmed to do so.
948
949 If a command ends with point inside or at the boundary of
950 invisible text, the main editing loop relocates point to one of the
951 two ends of the invisible text. Emacs chooses the direction of
952 relocation so that it is the same as the overall movement direction of
953 the command; if in doubt, it prefers a position where an inserted char
954 would not inherit the @code{invisible} property. Additionally, if the
955 text is not replaced by an ellipsis and the command only moved within
956 the invisible text, then point is moved one extra character so as to
957 try and reflect the command's movement by a visible movement of the
958 cursor.
959
960 Thus, if the command moved point back to an invisible range (with the usual
961 stickiness), Emacs moves point back to the beginning of that range. If the
962 command moved point forward into an invisible range, Emacs moves point forward
963 to the first visible character that follows the invisible text and then forward
964 one more character.
965
966 These @dfn{adjustments} of point that ended up in the middle of
967 invisible text can be disabled by setting @code{disable-point-adjustment}
968 to a non-@code{nil} value. @xref{Adjusting Point}.
969
970 Incremental search can make invisible overlays visible temporarily
971 and/or permanently when a match includes invisible text. To enable
972 this, the overlay should have a non-@code{nil}
973 @code{isearch-open-invisible} property. The property value should be a
974 function to be called with the overlay as an argument. This function
975 should make the overlay visible permanently; it is used when the match
976 overlaps the overlay on exit from the search.
977
978 During the search, such overlays are made temporarily visible by
979 temporarily modifying their invisible and intangible properties. If you
980 want this to be done differently for a certain overlay, give it an
981 @code{isearch-open-invisible-temporary} property which is a function.
982 The function is called with two arguments: the first is the overlay, and
983 the second is @code{nil} to make the overlay visible, or @code{t} to
984 make it invisible again.
985
986 @node Selective Display
987 @section Selective Display
988 @c @cindex selective display Duplicates selective-display
989
990 @dfn{Selective display} refers to a pair of related features for
991 hiding certain lines on the screen.
992
993 @cindex explicit selective display
994 The first variant, explicit selective display, was designed for use in a Lisp
995 program: it controls which lines are hidden by altering the text. This kind of
996 hiding is now obsolete; instead you can get the same effect with the
997 @code{invisible} property (@pxref{Invisible Text}).
998
999 In the second variant, the choice of lines to hide is made
1000 automatically based on indentation. This variant is designed to be a
1001 user-level feature.
1002
1003 The way you control explicit selective display is by replacing a
1004 newline (control-j) with a carriage return (control-m). The text that
1005 was formerly a line following that newline is now hidden. Strictly
1006 speaking, it is temporarily no longer a line at all, since only
1007 newlines can separate lines; it is now part of the previous line.
1008
1009 Selective display does not directly affect editing commands. For
1010 example, @kbd{C-f} (@code{forward-char}) moves point unhesitatingly
1011 into hidden text. However, the replacement of newline characters with
1012 carriage return characters affects some editing commands. For
1013 example, @code{next-line} skips hidden lines, since it searches only
1014 for newlines. Modes that use selective display can also define
1015 commands that take account of the newlines, or that control which
1016 parts of the text are hidden.
1017
1018 When you write a selectively displayed buffer into a file, all the
1019 control-m's are output as newlines. This means that when you next read
1020 in the file, it looks OK, with nothing hidden. The selective display
1021 effect is seen only within Emacs.
1022
1023 @defvar selective-display
1024 This buffer-local variable enables selective display. This means that
1025 lines, or portions of lines, may be made hidden.
1026
1027 @itemize @bullet
1028 @item
1029 If the value of @code{selective-display} is @code{t}, then the character
1030 control-m marks the start of hidden text; the control-m, and the rest
1031 of the line following it, are not displayed. This is explicit selective
1032 display.
1033
1034 @item
1035 If the value of @code{selective-display} is a positive integer, then
1036 lines that start with more than that many columns of indentation are not
1037 displayed.
1038 @end itemize
1039
1040 When some portion of a buffer is hidden, the vertical movement
1041 commands operate as if that portion did not exist, allowing a single
1042 @code{next-line} command to skip any number of hidden lines.
1043 However, character movement commands (such as @code{forward-char}) do
1044 not skip the hidden portion, and it is possible (if tricky) to insert
1045 or delete text in an hidden portion.
1046
1047 In the examples below, we show the @emph{display appearance} of the
1048 buffer @code{foo}, which changes with the value of
1049 @code{selective-display}. The @emph{contents} of the buffer do not
1050 change.
1051
1052 @example
1053 @group
1054 (setq selective-display nil)
1055 @result{} nil
1056
1057 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1058 1 on this column
1059 2on this column
1060 3n this column
1061 3n this column
1062 2on this column
1063 1 on this column
1064 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1065 @end group
1066
1067 @group
1068 (setq selective-display 2)
1069 @result{} 2
1070
1071 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1072 1 on this column
1073 2on this column
1074 2on this column
1075 1 on this column
1076 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1077 @end group
1078 @end example
1079 @end defvar
1080
1081 @defopt selective-display-ellipses
1082 If this buffer-local variable is non-@code{nil}, then Emacs displays
1083 @samp{@dots{}} at the end of a line that is followed by hidden text.
1084 This example is a continuation of the previous one.
1085
1086 @example
1087 @group
1088 (setq selective-display-ellipses t)
1089 @result{} t
1090
1091 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1092 1 on this column
1093 2on this column ...
1094 2on this column
1095 1 on this column
1096 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1097 @end group
1098 @end example
1099
1100 You can use a display table to substitute other text for the ellipsis
1101 (@samp{@dots{}}). @xref{Display Tables}.
1102 @end defopt
1103
1104 @node Temporary Displays
1105 @section Temporary Displays
1106 @cindex temporary display
1107 @cindex temporary buffer display
1108
1109 Temporary displays are used by Lisp programs to put output into a
1110 buffer and then present it to the user for perusal rather than for
1111 editing. Many help commands use this feature.
1112
1113 @defmac with-output-to-temp-buffer buffer-name body@dots{}
1114 This function executes the forms in @var{body} while arranging to insert
1115 any output they print into the buffer named @var{buffer-name}, which is
1116 first created if necessary, and put into Help mode. (See the similar
1117 form @code{with-temp-buffer-window} below.) Finally, the buffer is
1118 displayed in some window, but that window is not selected.
1119
1120 If the forms in @var{body} do not change the major mode in the output
1121 buffer, so that it is still Help mode at the end of their execution,
1122 then @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer} makes this buffer read-only at
1123 the end, and also scans it for function and variable names to make them
1124 into clickable cross-references. @xref{Docstring hyperlinks, , Tips for
1125 Documentation Strings}, in particular the item on hyperlinks in
1126 documentation strings, for more details.
1127
1128 The string @var{buffer-name} specifies the temporary buffer, which need
1129 not already exist. The argument must be a string, not a buffer. The
1130 buffer is erased initially (with no questions asked), and it is marked
1131 as unmodified after @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer} exits.
1132
1133 @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer} binds @code{standard-output} to the
1134 temporary buffer, then it evaluates the forms in @var{body}. Output
1135 using the Lisp output functions within @var{body} goes by default to
1136 that buffer (but screen display and messages in the echo area, although
1137 they are ``output'' in the general sense of the word, are not affected).
1138 @xref{Output Functions}.
1139
1140 Several hooks are available for customizing the behavior
1141 of this construct; they are listed below.
1142
1143 The value of the last form in @var{body} is returned.
1144
1145 @example
1146 @group
1147 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1148 This is the contents of foo.
1149 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1150 @end group
1151
1152 @group
1153 (with-output-to-temp-buffer "foo"
1154 (print 20)
1155 (print standard-output))
1156 @result{} #<buffer foo>
1157
1158 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1159
1160 20
1161
1162 #<buffer foo>
1163
1164 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1165 @end group
1166 @end example
1167 @end defmac
1168
1169 @defopt temp-buffer-show-function
1170 If this variable is non-@code{nil}, @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer}
1171 calls it as a function to do the job of displaying a help buffer. The
1172 function gets one argument, which is the buffer it should display.
1173
1174 It is a good idea for this function to run @code{temp-buffer-show-hook}
1175 just as @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer} normally would, inside of
1176 @code{save-selected-window} and with the chosen window and buffer
1177 selected.
1178 @end defopt
1179
1180 @defvar temp-buffer-setup-hook
1181 This normal hook is run by @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer} before
1182 evaluating @var{body}. When the hook runs, the temporary buffer is
1183 current. This hook is normally set up with a function to put the
1184 buffer in Help mode.
1185 @end defvar
1186
1187 @defvar temp-buffer-show-hook
1188 This normal hook is run by @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer} after
1189 displaying the temporary buffer. When the hook runs, the temporary buffer
1190 is current, and the window it was displayed in is selected.
1191 @end defvar
1192
1193 @defmac with-temp-buffer-window buffer-or-name action quit-function body@dots{}
1194 This macro is similar to @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer}. Like that
1195 construct, it executes @var{body} while arranging to insert any output
1196 it prints into the buffer named @var{buffer-or-name} and displays that
1197 buffer in some window. Unlike @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer},
1198 however, it does not automatically switch that buffer to Help mode.
1199
1200 The argument @var{buffer-or-name} specifies the temporary buffer. It
1201 can be either a buffer, which must already exist, or a string, in which
1202 case a buffer of that name is created, if necessary. The buffer is
1203 marked as unmodified and read-only when @code{with-temp-buffer-window}
1204 exits.
1205
1206 This macro does not call @code{temp-buffer-show-function}. Rather, it
1207 passes the @var{action} argument to @code{display-buffer}
1208 (@pxref{Choosing Window}) in order to display the buffer.
1209
1210 The value of the last form in @var{body} is returned, unless the
1211 argument @var{quit-function} is specified. In that case, it is called
1212 with two arguments: the window showing the buffer and the result of
1213 @var{body}. The final return value is then whatever @var{quit-function}
1214 returns.
1215
1216 @vindex temp-buffer-window-setup-hook
1217 @vindex temp-buffer-window-show-hook
1218 This macro uses the normal hooks @code{temp-buffer-window-setup-hook}
1219 and @code{temp-buffer-window-show-hook} in place of the analogous hooks
1220 run by @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer}.
1221 @end defmac
1222
1223 The two constructs described next are mostly identical to
1224 @code{with-temp-buffer-window} but differ from it as specified:
1225
1226 @defmac with-current-buffer-window buffer-or-name action quit-function &rest body
1227 This macro is like @code{with-temp-buffer-window} but unlike that makes
1228 the buffer specified by @var{buffer-or-name} current for running
1229 @var{body}.
1230 @end defmac
1231
1232 @defmac with-displayed-buffer-window buffer-or-name action quit-function &rest body
1233 This macro is like @code{with-current-buffer-window} but unlike that
1234 displays the buffer specified by @var{buffer-or-name} @emph{before}
1235 running @var{body}.
1236 @end defmac
1237
1238 A window showing a temporary buffer can be fit to the size of that
1239 buffer using the following mode:
1240
1241 @defopt temp-buffer-resize-mode
1242 When this minor mode is enabled, windows showing a temporary buffer are
1243 automatically resized to fit their buffer's contents.
1244
1245 A window is resized if and only if it has been specially created for the
1246 buffer. In particular, windows that have shown another buffer before
1247 are not resized. By default, this mode uses @code{fit-window-to-buffer}
1248 (@pxref{Resizing Windows}) for resizing. You can specify a different
1249 function by customizing the options @code{temp-buffer-max-height} and
1250 @code{temp-buffer-max-width} below.
1251 @end defopt
1252
1253 @defopt temp-buffer-max-height
1254 This option specifies the maximum height (in lines) of a window
1255 displaying a temporary buffer when @code{temp-buffer-resize-mode} is
1256 enabled. It can also be a function to be called to choose the height
1257 for such a buffer. It gets one argument, the buffer, and should return
1258 a positive integer. At the time the function is called, the window to
1259 be resized is selected.
1260 @end defopt
1261
1262 @defopt temp-buffer-max-width
1263 This option specifies the maximum width of a window (in columns)
1264 displaying a temporary buffer when @code{temp-buffer-resize-mode} is
1265 enabled. It can also be a function to be called to choose the width for
1266 such a buffer. It gets one argument, the buffer, and should return a
1267 positive integer. At the time the function is called, the window to be
1268 resized is selected.
1269 @end defopt
1270
1271 The following function uses the current buffer for temporal display:
1272
1273 @defun momentary-string-display string position &optional char message
1274 This function momentarily displays @var{string} in the current buffer at
1275 @var{position}. It has no effect on the undo list or on the buffer's
1276 modification status.
1277
1278 The momentary display remains until the next input event. If the next
1279 input event is @var{char}, @code{momentary-string-display} ignores it
1280 and returns. Otherwise, that event remains buffered for subsequent use
1281 as input. Thus, typing @var{char} will simply remove the string from
1282 the display, while typing (say) @kbd{C-f} will remove the string from
1283 the display and later (presumably) move point forward. The argument
1284 @var{char} is a space by default.
1285
1286 The return value of @code{momentary-string-display} is not meaningful.
1287
1288 If the string @var{string} does not contain control characters, you can
1289 do the same job in a more general way by creating (and then subsequently
1290 deleting) an overlay with a @code{before-string} property.
1291 @xref{Overlay Properties}.
1292
1293 If @var{message} is non-@code{nil}, it is displayed in the echo area
1294 while @var{string} is displayed in the buffer. If it is @code{nil}, a
1295 default message says to type @var{char} to continue.
1296
1297 In this example, point is initially located at the beginning of the
1298 second line:
1299
1300 @example
1301 @group
1302 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1303 This is the contents of foo.
1304 @point{}Second line.
1305 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1306 @end group
1307
1308 @group
1309 (momentary-string-display
1310 "**** Important Message! ****"
1311 (point) ?\r
1312 "Type RET when done reading")
1313 @result{} t
1314 @end group
1315
1316 @group
1317 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1318 This is the contents of foo.
1319 **** Important Message! ****Second line.
1320 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1321
1322 ---------- Echo Area ----------
1323 Type RET when done reading
1324 ---------- Echo Area ----------
1325 @end group
1326 @end example
1327 @end defun
1328
1329 @node Overlays
1330 @section Overlays
1331 @cindex overlays
1332 @c FIXME: mention intervals in this section?
1333
1334 You can use @dfn{overlays} to alter the appearance of a buffer's text on
1335 the screen, for the sake of presentation features. An overlay is an
1336 object that belongs to a particular buffer, and has a specified
1337 beginning and end. It also has properties that you can examine and set;
1338 these affect the display of the text within the overlay.
1339
1340 @cindex scalability of overlays
1341 @cindex overlays, scalability
1342 The visual effect of an overlay is the same as of the corresponding
1343 text property (@pxref{Text Properties}). However, due to a different
1344 implementation, overlays generally don't scale well (many operations
1345 take a time that is proportional to the number of overlays in the
1346 buffer). If you need to affect the visual appearance of many portions
1347 in the buffer, we recommend using text properties.
1348
1349 An overlay uses markers to record its beginning and end; thus,
1350 editing the text of the buffer adjusts the beginning and end of each
1351 overlay so that it stays with the text. When you create the overlay,
1352 you can specify whether text inserted at the beginning should be
1353 inside the overlay or outside, and likewise for the end of the overlay.
1354
1355 @menu
1356 * Managing Overlays:: Creating and moving overlays.
1357 * Overlay Properties:: How to read and set properties.
1358 What properties do to the screen display.
1359 * Finding Overlays:: Searching for overlays.
1360 @end menu
1361
1362 @node Managing Overlays
1363 @subsection Managing Overlays
1364 @cindex managing overlays
1365 @cindex overlays, managing
1366
1367 This section describes the functions to create, delete and move
1368 overlays, and to examine their contents. Overlay changes are not
1369 recorded in the buffer's undo list, since the overlays are not
1370 part of the buffer's contents.
1371
1372 @defun overlayp object
1373 This function returns @code{t} if @var{object} is an overlay.
1374 @end defun
1375
1376 @defun make-overlay start end &optional buffer front-advance rear-advance
1377 This function creates and returns an overlay that belongs to
1378 @var{buffer} and ranges from @var{start} to @var{end}. Both @var{start}
1379 and @var{end} must specify buffer positions; they may be integers or
1380 markers. If @var{buffer} is omitted, the overlay is created in the
1381 current buffer.
1382
1383 @cindex empty overlay
1384 @cindex overlay, empty
1385 An overlay whose @var{start} and @var{end} specify the same buffer
1386 position is known as @dfn{empty}. A non-empty overlay can become
1387 empty if the text between its @var{start} and @var{end} is deleted.
1388 When that happens, the overlay is by default not deleted, but you can
1389 cause it to be deleted by giving it the @samp{evaporate} property
1390 (@pxref{Overlay Properties, evaporate property}).
1391
1392 The arguments @var{front-advance} and @var{rear-advance} specify the
1393 marker insertion type for the start of the overlay and for the end of
1394 the overlay, respectively. @xref{Marker Insertion Types}. If they
1395 are both @code{nil}, the default, then the overlay extends to include
1396 any text inserted at the beginning, but not text inserted at the end.
1397 If @var{front-advance} is non-@code{nil}, text inserted at the
1398 beginning of the overlay is excluded from the overlay. If
1399 @var{rear-advance} is non-@code{nil}, text inserted at the end of the
1400 overlay is included in the overlay.
1401 @end defun
1402
1403 @defun overlay-start overlay
1404 This function returns the position at which @var{overlay} starts,
1405 as an integer.
1406 @end defun
1407
1408 @defun overlay-end overlay
1409 This function returns the position at which @var{overlay} ends,
1410 as an integer.
1411 @end defun
1412
1413 @defun overlay-buffer overlay
1414 This function returns the buffer that @var{overlay} belongs to. It
1415 returns @code{nil} if @var{overlay} has been deleted.
1416 @end defun
1417
1418 @defun delete-overlay overlay
1419 This function deletes @var{overlay}. The overlay continues to exist as
1420 a Lisp object, and its property list is unchanged, but it ceases to be
1421 attached to the buffer it belonged to, and ceases to have any effect on
1422 display.
1423
1424 A deleted overlay is not permanently disconnected. You can give it a
1425 position in a buffer again by calling @code{move-overlay}.
1426 @end defun
1427
1428 @defun move-overlay overlay start end &optional buffer
1429 This function moves @var{overlay} to @var{buffer}, and places its bounds
1430 at @var{start} and @var{end}. Both arguments @var{start} and @var{end}
1431 must specify buffer positions; they may be integers or markers.
1432
1433 If @var{buffer} is omitted, @var{overlay} stays in the same buffer it
1434 was already associated with; if @var{overlay} was deleted, it goes into
1435 the current buffer.
1436
1437 The return value is @var{overlay}.
1438
1439 This is the only valid way to change the endpoints of an overlay. Do
1440 not try modifying the markers in the overlay by hand, as that fails to
1441 update other vital data structures and can cause some overlays to be
1442 lost.
1443 @end defun
1444
1445 @defun remove-overlays &optional start end name value
1446 This function removes all the overlays between @var{start} and
1447 @var{end} whose property @var{name} has the value @var{value}. It can
1448 move the endpoints of the overlays in the region, or split them.
1449
1450 If @var{name} is omitted or @code{nil}, it means to delete all overlays in
1451 the specified region. If @var{start} and/or @var{end} are omitted or
1452 @code{nil}, that means the beginning and end of the buffer respectively.
1453 Therefore, @code{(remove-overlays)} removes all the overlays in the
1454 current buffer.
1455 @end defun
1456
1457 @defun copy-overlay overlay
1458 This function returns a copy of @var{overlay}. The copy has the same
1459 endpoints and properties as @var{overlay}. However, the marker
1460 insertion type for the start of the overlay and for the end of the
1461 overlay are set to their default values (@pxref{Marker Insertion
1462 Types}).
1463 @end defun
1464
1465 Here are some examples:
1466
1467 @example
1468 ;; @r{Create an overlay.}
1469 (setq foo (make-overlay 1 10))
1470 @result{} #<overlay from 1 to 10 in display.texi>
1471 (overlay-start foo)
1472 @result{} 1
1473 (overlay-end foo)
1474 @result{} 10
1475 (overlay-buffer foo)
1476 @result{} #<buffer display.texi>
1477 ;; @r{Give it a property we can check later.}
1478 (overlay-put foo 'happy t)
1479 @result{} t
1480 ;; @r{Verify the property is present.}
1481 (overlay-get foo 'happy)
1482 @result{} t
1483 ;; @r{Move the overlay.}
1484 (move-overlay foo 5 20)
1485 @result{} #<overlay from 5 to 20 in display.texi>
1486 (overlay-start foo)
1487 @result{} 5
1488 (overlay-end foo)
1489 @result{} 20
1490 ;; @r{Delete the overlay.}
1491 (delete-overlay foo)
1492 @result{} nil
1493 ;; @r{Verify it is deleted.}
1494 foo
1495 @result{} #<overlay in no buffer>
1496 ;; @r{A deleted overlay has no position.}
1497 (overlay-start foo)
1498 @result{} nil
1499 (overlay-end foo)
1500 @result{} nil
1501 (overlay-buffer foo)
1502 @result{} nil
1503 ;; @r{Undelete the overlay.}
1504 (move-overlay foo 1 20)
1505 @result{} #<overlay from 1 to 20 in display.texi>
1506 ;; @r{Verify the results.}
1507 (overlay-start foo)
1508 @result{} 1
1509 (overlay-end foo)
1510 @result{} 20
1511 (overlay-buffer foo)
1512 @result{} #<buffer display.texi>
1513 ;; @r{Moving and deleting the overlay does not change its properties.}
1514 (overlay-get foo 'happy)
1515 @result{} t
1516 @end example
1517
1518 Emacs stores the overlays of each buffer in two lists, divided
1519 around an arbitrary center position. One list extends backwards
1520 through the buffer from that center position, and the other extends
1521 forwards from that center position. The center position can be anywhere
1522 in the buffer.
1523
1524 @defun overlay-recenter pos
1525 This function recenters the overlays of the current buffer around
1526 position @var{pos}. That makes overlay lookup faster for positions
1527 near @var{pos}, but slower for positions far away from @var{pos}.
1528 @end defun
1529
1530 A loop that scans the buffer forwards, creating overlays, can run
1531 faster if you do @code{(overlay-recenter (point-max))} first.
1532
1533 @node Overlay Properties
1534 @subsection Overlay Properties
1535 @cindex overlay properties
1536
1537 Overlay properties are like text properties in that the properties that
1538 alter how a character is displayed can come from either source. But in
1539 most respects they are different. @xref{Text Properties}, for comparison.
1540
1541 Text properties are considered a part of the text; overlays and
1542 their properties are specifically considered not to be part of the
1543 text. Thus, copying text between various buffers and strings
1544 preserves text properties, but does not try to preserve overlays.
1545 Changing a buffer's text properties marks the buffer as modified,
1546 while moving an overlay or changing its properties does not. Unlike
1547 text property changes, overlay property changes are not recorded in
1548 the buffer's undo list.
1549
1550 Since more than one overlay can specify a property value for the
1551 same character, Emacs lets you specify a priority value of each
1552 overlay. In case two overlays have the same priority value, and one
1553 is nested in the other, then the inner one will have priority over the
1554 outer one. If neither is nested in the other then you should not make
1555 assumptions about which overlay will prevail.
1556
1557 These functions read and set the properties of an overlay:
1558
1559 @defun overlay-get overlay prop
1560 This function returns the value of property @var{prop} recorded in
1561 @var{overlay}, if any. If @var{overlay} does not record any value for
1562 that property, but it does have a @code{category} property which is a
1563 symbol, that symbol's @var{prop} property is used. Otherwise, the value
1564 is @code{nil}.
1565 @end defun
1566
1567 @defun overlay-put overlay prop value
1568 This function sets the value of property @var{prop} recorded in
1569 @var{overlay} to @var{value}. It returns @var{value}.
1570 @end defun
1571
1572 @defun overlay-properties overlay
1573 This returns a copy of the property list of @var{overlay}.
1574 @end defun
1575
1576 See also the function @code{get-char-property} which checks both
1577 overlay properties and text properties for a given character.
1578 @xref{Examining Properties}.
1579
1580 Many overlay properties have special meanings; here is a table
1581 of them:
1582
1583 @table @code
1584 @item priority
1585 @kindex priority @r{(overlay property)}
1586 This property's value determines the priority of the overlay.
1587 If you want to specify a priority value, use either @code{nil}
1588 (or zero), or a positive integer. Any other value has undefined behavior.
1589
1590 The priority matters when two or more overlays cover the same
1591 character and both specify the same property; the one whose
1592 @code{priority} value is larger overrides the other. For the
1593 @code{face} property, the higher priority overlay's value does not
1594 completely override the other value; instead, its face attributes
1595 override the face attributes of the lower priority @code{face}
1596 property.
1597
1598 Currently, all overlays take priority over text properties.
1599
1600 Note that Emacs sometimes uses non-numeric priority values for some of
1601 its internal overlays, so do not try to do arithmetic on the
1602 priority of an overlay (unless it is one that you created). If you
1603 need to put overlays in priority order, use the @var{sorted} argument
1604 of @code{overlays-at}. @xref{Finding Overlays}.
1605
1606 @item window
1607 @kindex window @r{(overlay property)}
1608 If the @code{window} property is non-@code{nil}, then the overlay
1609 applies only on that window.
1610
1611 @item category
1612 @kindex category @r{(overlay property)}
1613 If an overlay has a @code{category} property, we call it the
1614 @dfn{category} of the overlay. It should be a symbol. The properties
1615 of the symbol serve as defaults for the properties of the overlay.
1616
1617 @item face
1618 @kindex face @r{(overlay property)}
1619 This property controls the appearance of the text (@pxref{Faces}).
1620 The value of the property can be the following:
1621
1622 @itemize @bullet
1623 @item
1624 A face name (a symbol or string).
1625
1626 @item
1627 An anonymous face: a property list of the form @code{(@var{keyword}
1628 @var{value} @dots{})}, where each @var{keyword} is a face attribute
1629 name and @var{value} is a value for that attribute.
1630
1631 @item
1632 A list of faces. Each list element should be either a face name or an
1633 anonymous face. This specifies a face which is an aggregate of the
1634 attributes of each of the listed faces. Faces occurring earlier in
1635 the list have higher priority.
1636
1637 @item
1638 A cons cell of the form @code{(foreground-color . @var{color-name})}
1639 or @code{(background-color . @var{color-name})}. This specifies the
1640 foreground or background color, similar to @code{(:foreground
1641 @var{color-name})} or @code{(:background @var{color-name})}. This
1642 form is supported for backward compatibility only, and should be
1643 avoided.
1644 @end itemize
1645
1646 @item mouse-face
1647 @kindex mouse-face @r{(overlay property)}
1648 This property is used instead of @code{face} when the mouse is within
1649 the range of the overlay. However, Emacs ignores all face attributes
1650 from this property that alter the text size (e.g., @code{:height},
1651 @code{:weight}, and @code{:slant}). Those attributes are always the
1652 same as in the unhighlighted text.
1653
1654 @item display
1655 @kindex display @r{(overlay property)}
1656 This property activates various features that change the
1657 way text is displayed. For example, it can make text appear taller
1658 or shorter, higher or lower, wider or narrower, or replaced with an image.
1659 @xref{Display Property}.
1660
1661 @item help-echo
1662 @kindex help-echo @r{(overlay property)}
1663 If an overlay has a @code{help-echo} property, then when you move the
1664 mouse onto the text in the overlay, Emacs displays a help string in the
1665 echo area, or in the tooltip window. For details see @ref{Text
1666 help-echo}.
1667
1668 @item field
1669 @kindex field @r{(overlay property)}
1670 @c Copied from Special Properties.
1671 Consecutive characters with the same @code{field} property constitute a
1672 @emph{field}. Some motion functions including @code{forward-word} and
1673 @code{beginning-of-line} stop moving at a field boundary.
1674 @xref{Fields}.
1675
1676 @item modification-hooks
1677 @kindex modification-hooks @r{(overlay property)}
1678 This property's value is a list of functions to be called if any
1679 character within the overlay is changed or if text is inserted strictly
1680 within the overlay.
1681
1682 The hook functions are called both before and after each change.
1683 If the functions save the information they receive, and compare notes
1684 between calls, they can determine exactly what change has been made
1685 in the buffer text.
1686
1687 When called before a change, each function receives four arguments: the
1688 overlay, @code{nil}, and the beginning and end of the text range to be
1689 modified.
1690
1691 When called after a change, each function receives five arguments: the
1692 overlay, @code{t}, the beginning and end of the text range just
1693 modified, and the length of the pre-change text replaced by that range.
1694 (For an insertion, the pre-change length is zero; for a deletion, that
1695 length is the number of characters deleted, and the post-change
1696 beginning and end are equal.)
1697
1698 If these functions modify the buffer, they should bind
1699 @code{inhibit-modification-hooks} to @code{t} around doing so, to
1700 avoid confusing the internal mechanism that calls these hooks.
1701
1702 Text properties also support the @code{modification-hooks} property,
1703 but the details are somewhat different (@pxref{Special Properties}).
1704
1705 @item insert-in-front-hooks
1706 @kindex insert-in-front-hooks @r{(overlay property)}
1707 This property's value is a list of functions to be called before and
1708 after inserting text right at the beginning of the overlay. The calling
1709 conventions are the same as for the @code{modification-hooks} functions.
1710
1711 @item insert-behind-hooks
1712 @kindex insert-behind-hooks @r{(overlay property)}
1713 This property's value is a list of functions to be called before and
1714 after inserting text right at the end of the overlay. The calling
1715 conventions are the same as for the @code{modification-hooks} functions.
1716
1717 @item invisible
1718 @kindex invisible @r{(overlay property)}
1719 The @code{invisible} property can make the text in the overlay
1720 invisible, which means that it does not appear on the screen.
1721 @xref{Invisible Text}, for details.
1722
1723 @item intangible
1724 @kindex intangible @r{(overlay property)}
1725 The @code{intangible} property on an overlay works just like the
1726 @code{intangible} text property. It is obsolete. @xref{Special
1727 Properties}, for details.
1728
1729 @item isearch-open-invisible
1730 This property tells incremental search how to make an invisible overlay
1731 visible, permanently, if the final match overlaps it. @xref{Invisible
1732 Text}.
1733
1734 @item isearch-open-invisible-temporary
1735 This property tells incremental search how to make an invisible overlay
1736 visible, temporarily, during the search. @xref{Invisible Text}.
1737
1738 @item before-string
1739 @kindex before-string @r{(overlay property)}
1740 This property's value is a string to add to the display at the beginning
1741 of the overlay. The string does not appear in the buffer in any
1742 sense---only on the screen.
1743
1744 @item after-string
1745 @kindex after-string @r{(overlay property)}
1746 This property's value is a string to add to the display at the end of
1747 the overlay. The string does not appear in the buffer in any
1748 sense---only on the screen.
1749
1750 @item line-prefix
1751 This property specifies a display spec to prepend to each
1752 non-continuation line at display-time. @xref{Truncation}.
1753
1754 @item wrap-prefix
1755 This property specifies a display spec to prepend to each continuation
1756 line at display-time. @xref{Truncation}.
1757
1758 @item evaporate
1759 @kindex evaporate @r{(overlay property)}
1760 If this property is non-@code{nil}, the overlay is deleted automatically
1761 if it becomes empty (i.e., if its length becomes zero). If you give
1762 an empty overlay (@pxref{Managing Overlays, empty overlay}) a
1763 non-@code{nil} @code{evaporate} property, that deletes it immediately.
1764 Note that, unless an overlay has this property, it will not be deleted
1765 when the text between its starting and ending positions is deleted
1766 from the buffer.
1767
1768 @item keymap
1769 @cindex keymap of character (and overlays)
1770 @kindex keymap @r{(overlay property)}
1771 If this property is non-@code{nil}, it specifies a keymap for a portion of the
1772 text. This keymap is used when the character after point is within the
1773 overlay, and takes precedence over most other keymaps. @xref{Active Keymaps}.
1774
1775 @item local-map
1776 @kindex local-map @r{(overlay property)}
1777 The @code{local-map} property is similar to @code{keymap} but replaces the
1778 buffer's local map rather than augmenting existing keymaps. This also means it
1779 has lower precedence than minor mode keymaps.
1780 @end table
1781
1782 The @code{keymap} and @code{local-map} properties do not affect a
1783 string displayed by the @code{before-string}, @code{after-string}, or
1784 @code{display} properties. This is only relevant for mouse clicks and
1785 other mouse events that fall on the string, since point is never on
1786 the string. To bind special mouse events for the string, assign it a
1787 @code{keymap} or @code{local-map} text property. @xref{Special
1788 Properties}.
1789
1790 @node Finding Overlays
1791 @subsection Searching for Overlays
1792 @cindex searching for overlays
1793 @cindex overlays, searching for
1794
1795 @defun overlays-at pos &optional sorted
1796 This function returns a list of all the overlays that cover the character at
1797 position @var{pos} in the current buffer. If @var{sorted} is non-@code{nil},
1798 the list is in decreasing order of priority, otherwise it is in no particular
1799 order. An overlay contains position @var{pos} if it begins at or before
1800 @var{pos}, and ends after @var{pos}.
1801
1802 To illustrate usage, here is a Lisp function that returns a list of the
1803 overlays that specify property @var{prop} for the character at point:
1804
1805 @smallexample
1806 (defun find-overlays-specifying (prop)
1807 (let ((overlays (overlays-at (point)))
1808 found)
1809 (while overlays
1810 (let ((overlay (car overlays)))
1811 (if (overlay-get overlay prop)
1812 (setq found (cons overlay found))))
1813 (setq overlays (cdr overlays)))
1814 found))
1815 @end smallexample
1816 @end defun
1817
1818 @defun overlays-in beg end
1819 This function returns a list of the overlays that overlap the region
1820 @var{beg} through @var{end}. An overlay overlaps with a region if it
1821 contains one or more characters in the region; empty overlays
1822 (@pxref{Managing Overlays, empty overlay}) overlap if they are at
1823 @var{beg}, strictly between @var{beg} and @var{end}, or at @var{end}
1824 when @var{end} denotes the position at the end of the buffer.
1825 @end defun
1826
1827 @defun next-overlay-change pos
1828 This function returns the buffer position of the next beginning or end
1829 of an overlay, after @var{pos}. If there is none, it returns
1830 @code{(point-max)}.
1831 @end defun
1832
1833 @defun previous-overlay-change pos
1834 This function returns the buffer position of the previous beginning or
1835 end of an overlay, before @var{pos}. If there is none, it returns
1836 @code{(point-min)}.
1837 @end defun
1838
1839 As an example, here's a simplified (and inefficient) version of the
1840 primitive function @code{next-single-char-property-change}
1841 (@pxref{Property Search}). It searches forward from position
1842 @var{pos} for the next position where the value of a given property
1843 @code{prop}, as obtained from either overlays or text properties,
1844 changes.
1845
1846 @smallexample
1847 (defun next-single-char-property-change (position prop)
1848 (save-excursion
1849 (goto-char position)
1850 (let ((propval (get-char-property (point) prop)))
1851 (while (and (not (eobp))
1852 (eq (get-char-property (point) prop) propval))
1853 (goto-char (min (next-overlay-change (point))
1854 (next-single-property-change (point) prop)))))
1855 (point)))
1856 @end smallexample
1857
1858 @node Size of Displayed Text
1859 @section Size of Displayed Text
1860 @cindex size of text on display
1861 @cindex character width on display
1862
1863 Since not all characters have the same width, these functions let you
1864 check the width of a character. @xref{Primitive Indent}, and
1865 @ref{Screen Lines}, for related functions.
1866
1867 @defun char-width char
1868 This function returns the width in columns of the character
1869 @var{char}, if it were displayed in the current buffer (i.e., taking
1870 into account the buffer's display table, if any; @pxref{Display
1871 Tables}). The width of a tab character is usually @code{tab-width}
1872 (@pxref{Usual Display}).
1873 @end defun
1874
1875 @defun string-width string
1876 This function returns the width in columns of the string @var{string},
1877 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
1878 @end defun
1879
1880 @defun truncate-string-to-width string width &optional start-column padding ellipsis
1881 This function returns the part of @var{string} that fits within
1882 @var{width} columns, as a new string.
1883
1884 If @var{string} does not reach @var{width}, then the result ends where
1885 @var{string} ends. If one multi-column character in @var{string}
1886 extends across the column @var{width}, that character is not included in
1887 the result. Thus, the result can fall short of @var{width} but cannot
1888 go beyond it.
1889
1890 The optional argument @var{start-column} specifies the starting column.
1891 If this is non-@code{nil}, then the first @var{start-column} columns of
1892 the string are omitted from the value. If one multi-column character in
1893 @var{string} extends across the column @var{start-column}, that
1894 character is not included.
1895
1896 The optional argument @var{padding}, if non-@code{nil}, is a padding
1897 character added at the beginning and end of the result string, to extend
1898 it to exactly @var{width} columns. The padding character is used at the
1899 end of the result if it falls short of @var{width}. It is also used at
1900 the beginning of the result if one multi-column character in
1901 @var{string} extends across the column @var{start-column}.
1902
1903 @vindex truncate-string-ellipsis
1904 If @var{ellipsis} is non-@code{nil}, it should be a string which will
1905 replace the end of @var{string} (including any padding) if it extends
1906 beyond @var{width}, unless the display width of @var{string} is equal
1907 to or less than the display width of @var{ellipsis}. If
1908 @var{ellipsis} is non-@code{nil} and not a string, it stands for
1909 the value of the variable @code{truncate-string-ellipsis}.
1910
1911 @example
1912 (truncate-string-to-width "\tab\t" 12 4)
1913 @result{} "ab"
1914 (truncate-string-to-width "\tab\t" 12 4 ?\s)
1915 @result{} " ab "
1916 @end example
1917 @end defun
1918
1919 The following function returns the size in pixels of text as if it were
1920 displayed in a given window. This function is used by
1921 @code{fit-window-to-buffer} and @code{fit-frame-to-buffer}
1922 (@pxref{Resizing Windows}) to make a window exactly as large as the text
1923 it contains.
1924
1925 @defun window-text-pixel-size &optional window from to x-limit y-limit mode-and-header-line
1926 This function returns the size of the text of @var{window}'s buffer in
1927 pixels. @var{window} must be a live window and defaults to the selected
1928 one. The return value is a cons of the maximum pixel-width of any text
1929 line and the maximum pixel-height of all text lines.
1930
1931 The optional argument @var{from}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the first
1932 text position to consider and defaults to the minimum accessible
1933 position of the buffer. If @var{from} is @code{t}, it uses the minimum
1934 accessible position that is not a newline character. The optional
1935 argument @var{to}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the last text position
1936 to consider and defaults to the maximum accessible position of the
1937 buffer. If @var{to} is @code{t}, it uses the maximum accessible
1938 position that is not a newline character.
1939
1940 The optional argument @var{x-limit}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the
1941 maximum pixel-width that can be returned. @var{x-limit} @code{nil} or
1942 omitted, means to use the pixel-width of @var{window}'s body
1943 (@pxref{Window Sizes}); this is useful when the caller does not intend
1944 to change the width of @var{window}. Otherwise, the caller should
1945 specify here the maximum width @var{window}'s body may assume. Text
1946 whose x-coordinate is beyond @var{x-limit} is ignored. Since
1947 calculating the width of long lines can take some time, it's always a
1948 good idea to make this argument as small as needed; in particular, if
1949 the buffer might contain long lines that will be truncated anyway.
1950
1951 The optional argument @var{y-limit}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the
1952 maximum pixel-height that can be returned. Text lines whose
1953 y-coordinate is beyond @var{y-limit} are ignored. Since calculating the
1954 pixel-height of a large buffer can take some time, it makes sense to
1955 specify this argument; in particular, if the caller does not know the
1956 size of the buffer.
1957
1958 The optional argument @var{mode-and-header-line} @code{nil} or omitted
1959 means to not include the height of the mode- or header-line of
1960 @var{window} in the return value. If it is either the symbol
1961 @code{mode-line} or @code{header-line}, include only the height of that
1962 line, if present, in the return value. If it is @code{t}, include the
1963 height of both, if present, in the return value.
1964 @end defun
1965
1966
1967 @node Line Height
1968 @section Line Height
1969 @cindex line height
1970 @cindex height of a line
1971
1972 The total height of each display line consists of the height of the
1973 contents of the line, plus optional additional vertical line spacing
1974 above or below the display line.
1975
1976 The height of the line contents is the maximum height of any character
1977 or image on that display line, including the final newline if there is
1978 one. (A display line that is continued doesn't include a final
1979 newline.) That is the default line height, if you do nothing to specify
1980 a greater height. (In the most common case, this equals the height of
1981 the corresponding frame's default font, see @ref{Frame Font}.)
1982
1983 There are several ways to explicitly specify a larger line height,
1984 either by specifying an absolute height for the display line, or by
1985 specifying vertical space. However, no matter what you specify, the
1986 actual line height can never be less than the default.
1987
1988 @kindex line-height @r{(text property)}
1989 A newline can have a @code{line-height} text or overlay property
1990 that controls the total height of the display line ending in that
1991 newline.
1992
1993 If the property value is @code{t}, the newline character has no
1994 effect on the displayed height of the line---the visible contents
1995 alone determine the height. This is useful for tiling small images
1996 (or image slices) without adding blank areas between the images.
1997
1998 If the property value is a list of the form @code{(@var{height}
1999 @var{total})}, that adds extra space @emph{below} the display line.
2000 First Emacs uses @var{height} as a height spec to control extra space
2001 @emph{above} the line; then it adds enough space @emph{below} the line
2002 to bring the total line height up to @var{total}. In this case, the
2003 other ways to specify the line spacing are ignored.
2004
2005 @cindex height spec
2006 Any other kind of property value is a height spec, which translates
2007 into a number---the specified line height. There are several ways to
2008 write a height spec; here's how each of them translates into a number:
2009
2010 @table @code
2011 @item @var{integer}
2012 If the height spec is a positive integer, the height value is that integer.
2013 @item @var{float}
2014 If the height spec is a float, @var{float}, the numeric height value
2015 is @var{float} times the frame's default line height.
2016 @item (@var{face} . @var{ratio})
2017 If the height spec is a cons of the format shown, the numeric height
2018 is @var{ratio} times the height of face @var{face}. @var{ratio} can
2019 be any type of number, or @code{nil} which means a ratio of 1.
2020 If @var{face} is @code{t}, it refers to the current face.
2021 @item (nil . @var{ratio})
2022 If the height spec is a cons of the format shown, the numeric height
2023 is @var{ratio} times the height of the contents of the line.
2024 @end table
2025
2026 Thus, any valid height spec determines the height in pixels, one way
2027 or another. If the line contents' height is less than that, Emacs
2028 adds extra vertical space above the line to achieve the specified
2029 total height.
2030
2031 If you don't specify the @code{line-height} property, the line's
2032 height consists of the contents' height plus the line spacing.
2033 There are several ways to specify the line spacing for different
2034 parts of Emacs text.
2035
2036 On graphical terminals, you can specify the line spacing for all
2037 lines in a frame, using the @code{line-spacing} frame parameter
2038 (@pxref{Layout Parameters}). However, if the default value of
2039 @code{line-spacing} is non-@code{nil}, it overrides the
2040 frame's @code{line-spacing} parameter. An integer specifies the
2041 number of pixels put below lines. A floating-point number specifies
2042 the spacing relative to the frame's default line height.
2043
2044 @vindex line-spacing
2045 You can specify the line spacing for all lines in a buffer via the
2046 buffer-local @code{line-spacing} variable. An integer specifies
2047 the number of pixels put below lines. A floating-point number
2048 specifies the spacing relative to the default frame line height. This
2049 overrides line spacings specified for the frame.
2050
2051 @kindex line-spacing @r{(text property)}
2052 Finally, a newline can have a @code{line-spacing} text or overlay
2053 property that overrides the default frame line spacing and the buffer
2054 local @code{line-spacing} variable, for the display line ending in
2055 that newline.
2056
2057 One way or another, these mechanisms specify a Lisp value for the
2058 spacing of each line. The value is a height spec, and it translates
2059 into a Lisp value as described above. However, in this case the
2060 numeric height value specifies the line spacing, rather than the line
2061 height.
2062
2063 On text terminals, the line spacing cannot be altered.
2064
2065 @node Faces
2066 @section Faces
2067 @cindex faces
2068
2069 A @dfn{face} is a collection of graphical attributes for displaying
2070 text: font, foreground color, background color, optional underlining,
2071 etc. Faces control how Emacs displays text in buffers, as well as
2072 other parts of the frame such as the mode line.
2073
2074 @cindex anonymous face
2075 One way to represent a face is as a property list of attributes,
2076 like @code{(:foreground "red" :weight bold)}. Such a list is called
2077 an @dfn{anonymous face}. For example, you can assign an anonymous
2078 face as the value of the @code{face} text property, and Emacs will
2079 display the underlying text with the specified attributes.
2080 @xref{Special Properties}.
2081
2082 @cindex face name
2083 More commonly, a face is referred to via a @dfn{face name}: a Lisp
2084 symbol associated with a set of face attributes@footnote{For backward
2085 compatibility, you can also use a string to specify a face name; that
2086 is equivalent to a Lisp symbol with the same name.}. Named faces are
2087 defined using the @code{defface} macro (@pxref{Defining Faces}).
2088 Emacs comes with several standard named faces (@pxref{Basic Faces}).
2089
2090 Many parts of Emacs required named faces, and do not accept
2091 anonymous faces. These include the functions documented in
2092 @ref{Attribute Functions}, and the variable @code{font-lock-keywords}
2093 (@pxref{Search-based Fontification}). Unless otherwise stated, we
2094 will use the term @dfn{face} to refer only to named faces.
2095
2096 @defun facep object
2097 This function returns a non-@code{nil} value if @var{object} is a
2098 named face: a Lisp symbol or string which serves as a face name.
2099 Otherwise, it returns @code{nil}.
2100 @end defun
2101
2102 @menu
2103 * Face Attributes:: What is in a face?
2104 * Defining Faces:: How to define a face.
2105 * Attribute Functions:: Functions to examine and set face attributes.
2106 * Displaying Faces:: How Emacs combines the faces specified for a character.
2107 * Face Remapping:: Remapping faces to alternative definitions.
2108 * Face Functions:: How to define and examine faces.
2109 * Auto Faces:: Hook for automatic face assignment.
2110 * Basic Faces:: Faces that are defined by default.
2111 * Font Selection:: Finding the best available font for a face.
2112 * Font Lookup:: Looking up the names of available fonts
2113 and information about them.
2114 * Fontsets:: A fontset is a collection of fonts
2115 that handle a range of character sets.
2116 * Low-Level Font:: Lisp representation for character display fonts.
2117 @end menu
2118
2119 @node Face Attributes
2120 @subsection Face Attributes
2121 @cindex face attributes
2122
2123 @dfn{Face attributes} determine the visual appearance of a face.
2124 The following table lists all the face attributes, their possible
2125 values, and their effects.
2126
2127 Apart from the values given below, each face attribute can have the
2128 value @code{unspecified}. This special value means that the face
2129 doesn't specify that attribute directly. An @code{unspecified}
2130 attribute tells Emacs to refer instead to a parent face (see the
2131 description @code{:inherit} attribute below); or, failing that, to an
2132 underlying face (@pxref{Displaying Faces}). The @code{default} face
2133 must specify all attributes.
2134
2135 Some of these attributes are meaningful only on certain kinds of
2136 displays. If your display cannot handle a certain attribute, the
2137 attribute is ignored.
2138
2139 @table @code
2140 @item :family
2141 Font family or fontset (a string). @xref{Fonts,,, emacs, The GNU
2142 Emacs Manual}, for more information about font families. The function
2143 @code{font-family-list} (see below) returns a list of available family
2144 names. @xref{Fontsets}, for information about fontsets.
2145
2146 @item :foundry
2147 The name of the @dfn{font foundry} for the font family specified by
2148 the @code{:family} attribute (a string). @xref{Fonts,,, emacs, The
2149 GNU Emacs Manual}.
2150
2151 @item :width
2152 Relative character width. This should be one of the symbols
2153 @code{ultra-condensed}, @code{extra-condensed}, @code{condensed},
2154 @code{semi-condensed}, @code{normal}, @code{semi-expanded},
2155 @code{expanded}, @code{extra-expanded}, or @code{ultra-expanded}.
2156
2157 @item :height
2158 The height of the font. In the simplest case, this is an integer in
2159 units of 1/10 point.
2160
2161 The value can also be floating point or a function, which
2162 specifies the height relative to an @dfn{underlying face}
2163 (@pxref{Displaying Faces}). A floating-point value
2164 specifies the amount by which to scale the height of the
2165 underlying face. A function value is called
2166 with one argument, the height of the underlying face, and returns the
2167 height of the new face. If the function is passed an integer
2168 argument, it must return an integer.
2169
2170 The height of the default face must be specified using an integer;
2171 floating point and function values are not allowed.
2172
2173 @item :weight
2174 Font weight---one of the symbols (from densest to faintest)
2175 @code{ultra-bold}, @code{extra-bold}, @code{bold}, @code{semi-bold},
2176 @code{normal}, @code{semi-light}, @code{light}, @code{extra-light}, or
2177 @code{ultra-light}. On text terminals which support
2178 variable-brightness text, any weight greater than normal is displayed
2179 as extra bright, and any weight less than normal is displayed as
2180 half-bright.
2181
2182 @cindex italic text
2183 @item :slant
2184 Font slant---one of the symbols @code{italic}, @code{oblique},
2185 @code{normal}, @code{reverse-italic}, or @code{reverse-oblique}. On
2186 text terminals that support variable-brightness text, slanted text is
2187 displayed as half-bright.
2188
2189 @item :foreground
2190 Foreground color, a string. The value can be a system-defined color
2191 name, or a hexadecimal color specification. @xref{Color Names}. On
2192 black-and-white displays, certain shades of gray are implemented by
2193 stipple patterns.
2194
2195 @item :distant-foreground
2196 Alternative foreground color, a string. This is like @code{:foreground}
2197 but the color is only used as a foreground when the background color is
2198 near to the foreground that would have been used. This is useful for
2199 example when marking text (i.e., the region face). If the text has a foreground
2200 that is visible with the region face, that foreground is used.
2201 If the foreground is near the region face background,
2202 @code{:distant-foreground} is used instead so the text is readable.
2203
2204 @item :background
2205 Background color, a string. The value can be a system-defined color
2206 name, or a hexadecimal color specification. @xref{Color Names}.
2207
2208 @cindex underlined text
2209 @item :underline
2210 Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what
2211 way. The possible values of the @code{:underline} attribute are:
2212
2213 @table @asis
2214 @item @code{nil}
2215 Don't underline.
2216
2217 @item @code{t}
2218 Underline with the foreground color of the face.
2219
2220 @item @var{color}
2221 Underline in color @var{color}, a string specifying a color.
2222
2223 @item @code{(:color @var{color} :style @var{style})}
2224 @var{color} is either a string, or the symbol @code{foreground-color},
2225 meaning the foreground color of the face. Omitting the attribute
2226 @code{:color} means to use the foreground color of the face.
2227 @var{style} should be a symbol @code{line} or @code{wave}, meaning to
2228 use a straight or wavy line. Omitting the attribute @code{:style}
2229 means to use a straight line.
2230 @end table
2231
2232 @cindex overlined text
2233 @item :overline
2234 Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
2235 If the value is @code{t}, overlining uses the foreground color of the
2236 face. If the value is a string, overlining uses that color. The
2237 value @code{nil} means do not overline.
2238
2239 @cindex strike-through text
2240 @item :strike-through
2241 Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
2242 color. The value is used like that of @code{:overline}.
2243
2244 @cindex 2D box
2245 @cindex 3D box
2246 @item :box
2247 Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its color, the
2248 width of the box lines, and 3D appearance. Here are the possible
2249 values of the @code{:box} attribute, and what they mean:
2250
2251 @table @asis
2252 @item @code{nil}
2253 Don't draw a box.
2254
2255 @item @code{t}
2256 Draw a box with lines of width 1, in the foreground color.
2257
2258 @item @var{color}
2259 Draw a box with lines of width 1, in color @var{color}.
2260
2261 @item @code{(:line-width @var{width} :color @var{color} :style @var{style})}
2262 This way you can explicitly specify all aspects of the box. The value
2263 @var{width} specifies the width of the lines to draw; it defaults to
2264 1. A negative width @var{-n} means to draw a line of width @var{n}
2265 that occupies the space of the underlying text, thus avoiding any
2266 increase in the character height or width.
2267
2268 The value @var{color} specifies the color to draw with. The default is
2269 the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
2270 color of the face for 3D boxes.
2271
2272 The value @var{style} specifies whether to draw a 3D box. If it is
2273 @code{released-button}, the box looks like a 3D button that is not being
2274 pressed. If it is @code{pressed-button}, the box looks like a 3D button
2275 that is being pressed. If it is @code{nil} or omitted, a plain 2D box
2276 is used.
2277 @end table
2278
2279 @item :inverse-video
2280 Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video. The
2281 value should be @code{t} (yes) or @code{nil} (no).
2282
2283 @item :stipple
2284 The background stipple, a bitmap.
2285
2286 The value can be a string; that should be the name of a file containing
2287 external-format X bitmap data. The file is found in the directories
2288 listed in the variable @code{x-bitmap-file-path}.
2289
2290 Alternatively, the value can specify the bitmap directly, with a list
2291 of the form @code{(@var{width} @var{height} @var{data})}. Here,
2292 @var{width} and @var{height} specify the size in pixels, and
2293 @var{data} is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap, row by
2294 row. Each row occupies @math{(@var{width} + 7) / 8} consecutive bytes
2295 in the string (which should be a unibyte string for best results).
2296 This means that each row always occupies at least one whole byte.
2297
2298 If the value is @code{nil}, that means use no stipple pattern.
2299
2300 Normally you do not need to set the stipple attribute, because it is
2301 used automatically to handle certain shades of gray.
2302
2303 @item :font
2304 The font used to display the face. Its value should be a font object.
2305 @xref{Low-Level Font}, for information about font objects, font specs,
2306 and font entities.
2307
2308 When specifying this attribute using @code{set-face-attribute}
2309 (@pxref{Attribute Functions}), you may also supply a font spec, a font
2310 entity, or a string. Emacs converts such values to an appropriate
2311 font object, and stores that font object as the actual attribute
2312 value. If you specify a string, the contents of the string should be
2313 a font name (@pxref{Fonts,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}); if the
2314 font name is an XLFD containing wildcards, Emacs chooses the first
2315 font matching those wildcards. Specifying this attribute also changes
2316 the values of the @code{:family}, @code{:foundry}, @code{:width},
2317 @code{:height}, @code{:weight}, and @code{:slant} attributes.
2318
2319 @cindex inheritance, for faces
2320 @item :inherit
2321 The name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list of face
2322 names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face like
2323 an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying
2324 faces (@pxref{Displaying Faces}). If a list of faces is used,
2325 attributes from faces earlier in the list override those from later
2326 faces.
2327 @end table
2328
2329 @defun font-family-list &optional frame
2330 This function returns a list of available font family names. The
2331 optional argument @var{frame} specifies the frame on which the text is
2332 to be displayed; if it is @code{nil}, the selected frame is used.
2333 @end defun
2334
2335 @defopt underline-minimum-offset
2336 This variable specifies the minimum distance between the baseline and
2337 the underline, in pixels, when displaying underlined text.
2338 @end defopt
2339
2340 @defopt x-bitmap-file-path
2341 This variable specifies a list of directories for searching
2342 for bitmap files, for the @code{:stipple} attribute.
2343 @end defopt
2344
2345 @defun bitmap-spec-p object
2346 This returns @code{t} if @var{object} is a valid bitmap specification,
2347 suitable for use with @code{:stipple} (see above). It returns
2348 @code{nil} otherwise.
2349 @end defun
2350
2351 @node Defining Faces
2352 @subsection Defining Faces
2353 @cindex defining faces
2354
2355 @cindex face spec
2356 The usual way to define a face is through the @code{defface} macro.
2357 This macro associates a face name (a symbol) with a default @dfn{face
2358 spec}. A face spec is a construct which specifies what attributes a
2359 face should have on any given terminal; for example, a face spec might
2360 specify one foreground color on high-color terminals, and a different
2361 foreground color on low-color terminals.
2362
2363 People are sometimes tempted to create a variable whose value is a
2364 face name. In the vast majority of cases, this is not necessary; the
2365 usual procedure is to define a face with @code{defface}, and then use
2366 its name directly.
2367
2368 @defmac defface face spec doc [keyword value]@dots{}
2369 This macro declares @var{face} as a named face whose default face spec
2370 is given by @var{spec}. You should not quote the symbol @var{face},
2371 and it should not end in @samp{-face} (that would be redundant). The
2372 argument @var{doc} is a documentation string for the face. The
2373 additional @var{keyword} arguments have the same meanings as in
2374 @code{defgroup} and @code{defcustom} (@pxref{Common Keywords}).
2375
2376 If @var{face} already has a default face spec, this macro does
2377 nothing.
2378
2379 The default face spec determines @var{face}'s appearance when no
2380 customizations are in effect (@pxref{Customization}). If @var{face}
2381 has already been customized (via Custom themes or via customizations
2382 read from the init file), its appearance is determined by the custom
2383 face spec(s), which override the default face spec @var{spec}.
2384 However, if the customizations are subsequently removed, the
2385 appearance of @var{face} will again be determined by its default face
2386 spec.
2387
2388 As an exception, if you evaluate a @code{defface} form with
2389 @kbd{C-M-x} in Emacs Lisp mode (@code{eval-defun}), a special feature
2390 of @code{eval-defun} overrides any custom face specs on the face,
2391 causing the face to reflect exactly what the @code{defface} says.
2392
2393 The @var{spec} argument is a @dfn{face spec}, which states how the
2394 face should appear on different kinds of terminals. It should be an
2395 alist whose elements each have the form
2396
2397 @example
2398 (@var{display} . @var{plist})
2399 @end example
2400
2401 @noindent
2402 @var{display} specifies a class of terminals (see below). @var{plist}
2403 is a property list of face attributes and their values, specifying how
2404 the face appears on such terminals. For backward compatibility, you
2405 can also write an element as @code{(@var{display} @var{plist})}.
2406
2407 The @var{display} part of an element of @var{spec} determines which
2408 terminals the element matches. If more than one element of @var{spec}
2409 matches a given terminal, the first element that matches is the one
2410 used for that terminal. There are three possibilities for
2411 @var{display}:
2412
2413 @table @asis
2414 @item @code{default}
2415 This element of @var{spec} doesn't match any terminal; instead, it
2416 specifies defaults that apply to all terminals. This element, if
2417 used, must be the first element of @var{spec}. Each of the following
2418 elements can override any or all of these defaults.
2419
2420 @item @code{t}
2421 This element of @var{spec} matches all terminals. Therefore, any
2422 subsequent elements of @var{spec} are never used. Normally @code{t}
2423 is used in the last (or only) element of @var{spec}.
2424
2425 @item a list
2426 If @var{display} is a list, each element should have the form
2427 @code{(@var{characteristic} @var{value}@dots{})}. Here
2428 @var{characteristic} specifies a way of classifying terminals, and the
2429 @var{value}s are possible classifications which @var{display} should
2430 apply to. Here are the possible values of @var{characteristic}:
2431
2432 @table @code
2433 @item type
2434 The kind of window system the terminal uses---either @code{graphic}
2435 (any graphics-capable display), @code{x}, @code{pc} (for the MS-DOS
2436 console), @code{w32} (for MS Windows 9X/NT/2K/XP), or @code{tty} (a
2437 non-graphics-capable display). @xref{Window Systems, window-system}.
2438
2439 @item class
2440 What kinds of colors the terminal supports---either @code{color},
2441 @code{grayscale}, or @code{mono}.
2442
2443 @item background
2444 The kind of background---either @code{light} or @code{dark}.
2445
2446 @item min-colors
2447 An integer that represents the minimum number of colors the terminal
2448 should support. This matches a terminal if its
2449 @code{display-color-cells} value is at least the specified integer.
2450
2451 @item supports
2452 Whether or not the terminal can display the face attributes given in
2453 @var{value}@dots{} (@pxref{Face Attributes}). @xref{Display Face
2454 Attribute Testing}, for more information on exactly how this testing
2455 is done.
2456 @end table
2457
2458 If an element of @var{display} specifies more than one @var{value} for
2459 a given @var{characteristic}, any of those values is acceptable. If
2460 @var{display} has more than one element, each element should specify a
2461 different @var{characteristic}; then @emph{each} characteristic of the
2462 terminal must match one of the @var{value}s specified for it in
2463 @var{display}.
2464 @end table
2465 @end defmac
2466
2467 For example, here's the definition of the standard face
2468 @code{highlight}:
2469
2470 @example
2471 (defface highlight
2472 '((((class color) (min-colors 88) (background light))
2473 :background "darkseagreen2")
2474 (((class color) (min-colors 88) (background dark))
2475 :background "darkolivegreen")
2476 (((class color) (min-colors 16) (background light))
2477 :background "darkseagreen2")
2478 (((class color) (min-colors 16) (background dark))
2479 :background "darkolivegreen")
2480 (((class color) (min-colors 8))
2481 :background "green" :foreground "black")
2482 (t :inverse-video t))
2483 "Basic face for highlighting."
2484 :group 'basic-faces)
2485 @end example
2486
2487 Internally, Emacs stores each face's default spec in its
2488 @code{face-defface-spec} symbol property (@pxref{Symbol Properties}).
2489 The @code{saved-face} property stores any face spec saved by the user
2490 using the customization buffer; the @code{customized-face} property
2491 stores the face spec customized for the current session, but not
2492 saved; and the @code{theme-face} property stores an alist associating
2493 the active customization settings and Custom themes with the face
2494 specs for that face. The face's documentation string is stored in the
2495 @code{face-documentation} property.
2496
2497 Normally, a face is declared just once, using @code{defface}, and
2498 any further changes to its appearance are applied using the Customize
2499 framework (e.g., via the Customize user interface or via the
2500 @code{custom-set-faces} function; @pxref{Applying Customizations}), or
2501 by face remapping (@pxref{Face Remapping}). In the rare event that
2502 you need to change a face spec directly from Lisp, you can use the
2503 @code{face-spec-set} function.
2504
2505 @defun face-spec-set face spec &optional spec-type
2506 This function applies @var{spec} as a face spec for @code{face}.
2507 @var{spec} should be a face spec, as described in the above
2508 documentation for @code{defface}.
2509
2510 This function also defines @var{face} as a valid face name if it is
2511 not already one, and (re)calculates its attributes on existing frames.
2512
2513 @cindex override spec @r{(for a face)}
2514 The argument @var{spec-type} determines which spec to set. If it is
2515 @code{nil} or @code{face-override-spec}, this function sets the
2516 @dfn{override spec}, which overrides over all other face specs on
2517 @var{face}. If it is @code{customized-face} or @code{saved-face},
2518 this function sets the customized spec or the saved custom spec. If
2519 it is @code{face-defface-spec}, this function sets the default face
2520 spec (the same one set by @code{defface}). If it is @code{reset},
2521 this function clears out all customization specs and override specs
2522 from @var{face} (in this case, the value of @var{spec} is ignored).
2523 Any other value of @var{spec-type} is reserved for internal use.
2524 @end defun
2525
2526 @node Attribute Functions
2527 @subsection Face Attribute Functions
2528 @cindex face attributes, access and modification
2529
2530 This section describes functions for directly accessing and
2531 modifying the attributes of a named face.
2532
2533 @defun face-attribute face attribute &optional frame inherit
2534 This function returns the value of the @var{attribute} attribute for
2535 @var{face} on @var{frame}.
2536
2537 If @var{frame} is @code{nil}, that means the selected frame
2538 (@pxref{Input Focus}). If @var{frame} is @code{t}, this function
2539 returns the value of the specified attribute for newly-created frames
2540 (this is normally @code{unspecified}, unless you have specified some
2541 value using @code{set-face-attribute}; see below).
2542
2543 If @var{inherit} is @code{nil}, only attributes directly defined by
2544 @var{face} are considered, so the return value may be
2545 @code{unspecified}, or a relative value. If @var{inherit} is
2546 non-@code{nil}, @var{face}'s definition of @var{attribute} is merged
2547 with the faces specified by its @code{:inherit} attribute; however the
2548 return value may still be @code{unspecified} or relative. If
2549 @var{inherit} is a face or a list of faces, then the result is further
2550 merged with that face (or faces), until it becomes specified and
2551 absolute.
2552
2553 To ensure that the return value is always specified and absolute, use
2554 a value of @code{default} for @var{inherit}; this will resolve any
2555 unspecified or relative values by merging with the @code{default} face
2556 (which is always completely specified).
2557
2558 For example,
2559
2560 @example
2561 (face-attribute 'bold :weight)
2562 @result{} bold
2563 @end example
2564 @end defun
2565
2566 @c FIXME: Add an index for "relative face attribute", maybe here? --xfq
2567 @defun face-attribute-relative-p attribute value
2568 This function returns non-@code{nil} if @var{value}, when used as the
2569 value of the face attribute @var{attribute}, is relative. This means
2570 it would modify, rather than completely override, any value that comes
2571 from a subsequent face in the face list or that is inherited from
2572 another face.
2573
2574 @code{unspecified} is a relative value for all attributes. For
2575 @code{:height}, floating point and function values are also relative.
2576
2577 For example:
2578
2579 @example
2580 (face-attribute-relative-p :height 2.0)
2581 @result{} t
2582 @end example
2583 @end defun
2584
2585 @defun face-all-attributes face &optional frame
2586 This function returns an alist of attributes of @var{face}. The
2587 elements of the result are name-value pairs of the form
2588 @w{@code{(@var{attr-name} . @var{attr-value})}}. Optional argument
2589 @var{frame} specifies the frame whose definition of @var{face} to
2590 return; if omitted or @code{nil}, the returned value describes the
2591 default attributes of @var{face} for newly created frames.
2592 @end defun
2593
2594 @defun merge-face-attribute attribute value1 value2
2595 If @var{value1} is a relative value for the face attribute
2596 @var{attribute}, returns it merged with the underlying value
2597 @var{value2}; otherwise, if @var{value1} is an absolute value for the
2598 face attribute @var{attribute}, returns @var{value1} unchanged.
2599 @end defun
2600
2601 Normally, Emacs uses the face specs of each face to automatically
2602 calculate its attributes on each frame (@pxref{Defining Faces}). The
2603 function @code{set-face-attribute} can override this calculation by
2604 directly assigning attributes to a face, either on a specific frame or
2605 for all frames. This function is mostly intended for internal usage.
2606
2607 @defun set-face-attribute face frame &rest arguments
2608 This function sets one or more attributes of @var{face} for
2609 @var{frame}. The attributes specifies in this way override the face
2610 spec(s) belonging to @var{face}.
2611
2612 The extra arguments @var{arguments} specify the attributes to set, and
2613 the values for them. They should consist of alternating attribute
2614 names (such as @code{:family} or @code{:underline}) and values. Thus,
2615
2616 @example
2617 (set-face-attribute 'foo nil :weight 'bold :slant 'italic)
2618 @end example
2619
2620 @noindent
2621 sets the attribute @code{:weight} to @code{bold} and the attribute
2622 @code{:slant} to @code{italic}.
2623
2624
2625 If @var{frame} is @code{t}, this function sets the default attributes
2626 for newly created frames. If @var{frame} is @code{nil}, this function
2627 sets the attributes for all existing frames, as well as for newly
2628 created frames.
2629 @end defun
2630
2631 The following commands and functions mostly provide compatibility
2632 with old versions of Emacs. They work by calling
2633 @code{set-face-attribute}. Values of @code{t} and @code{nil} for
2634 their @var{frame} argument are handled just like
2635 @code{set-face-attribute} and @code{face-attribute}. The commands
2636 read their arguments using the minibuffer, if called interactively.
2637
2638 @deffn Command set-face-foreground face color &optional frame
2639 @deffnx Command set-face-background face color &optional frame
2640 These set the @code{:foreground} attribute (or @code{:background}
2641 attribute, respectively) of @var{face} to @var{color}.
2642 @end deffn
2643
2644 @deffn Command set-face-stipple face pattern &optional frame
2645 This sets the @code{:stipple} attribute of @var{face} to
2646 @var{pattern}.
2647 @end deffn
2648
2649 @deffn Command set-face-font face font &optional frame
2650 This sets the @code{:font} attribute of @var{face} to @var{font}.
2651 @end deffn
2652
2653 @defun set-face-bold face bold-p &optional frame
2654 This sets the @code{:weight} attribute of @var{face} to @var{normal}
2655 if @var{bold-p} is @code{nil}, and to @var{bold} otherwise.
2656 @end defun
2657
2658 @defun set-face-italic face italic-p &optional frame
2659 This sets the @code{:slant} attribute of @var{face} to @var{normal} if
2660 @var{italic-p} is @code{nil}, and to @var{italic} otherwise.
2661 @end defun
2662
2663 @defun set-face-underline face underline &optional frame
2664 This sets the @code{:underline} attribute of @var{face} to
2665 @var{underline}.
2666 @end defun
2667
2668 @defun set-face-inverse-video face inverse-video-p &optional frame
2669 This sets the @code{:inverse-video} attribute of @var{face} to
2670 @var{inverse-video-p}.
2671 @end defun
2672
2673 @deffn Command invert-face face &optional frame
2674 This swaps the foreground and background colors of face @var{face}.
2675 @end deffn
2676
2677 The following functions examine the attributes of a face. They
2678 mostly provide compatibility with old versions of Emacs. If you don't
2679 specify @var{frame}, they refer to the selected frame; @code{t} refers
2680 to the default data for new frames. They return @code{unspecified} if
2681 the face doesn't define any value for that attribute. If
2682 @var{inherit} is @code{nil}, only an attribute directly defined by the
2683 face is returned. If @var{inherit} is non-@code{nil}, any faces
2684 specified by its @code{:inherit} attribute are considered as well, and
2685 if @var{inherit} is a face or a list of faces, then they are also
2686 considered, until a specified attribute is found. To ensure that the
2687 return value is always specified, use a value of @code{default} for
2688 @var{inherit}.
2689
2690 @defun face-font face &optional frame character
2691 This function returns the name of the font of face @var{face}.
2692
2693 If the optional argument @var{frame} is specified, it returns the name
2694 of the font of @var{face} for that frame. If @var{frame} is omitted or
2695 @code{nil}, the selected frame is used. And, in this case, if the
2696 optional third argument @var{character} is supplied, it returns the font
2697 name used for @var{character}.
2698 @end defun
2699
2700 @defun face-foreground face &optional frame inherit
2701 @defunx face-background face &optional frame inherit
2702 These functions return the foreground color (or background color,
2703 respectively) of face @var{face}, as a string.
2704 @end defun
2705
2706 @defun face-stipple face &optional frame inherit
2707 This function returns the name of the background stipple pattern of face
2708 @var{face}, or @code{nil} if it doesn't have one.
2709 @end defun
2710
2711 @defun face-bold-p face &optional frame inherit
2712 This function returns a non-@code{nil} value if the @code{:weight}
2713 attribute of @var{face} is bolder than normal (i.e., one of
2714 @code{semi-bold}, @code{bold}, @code{extra-bold}, or
2715 @code{ultra-bold}). Otherwise, it returns @code{nil}.
2716 @end defun
2717
2718 @defun face-italic-p face &optional frame inherit
2719 This function returns a non-@code{nil} value if the @code{:slant}
2720 attribute of @var{face} is @code{italic} or @code{oblique}, and
2721 @code{nil} otherwise.
2722 @end defun
2723
2724 @defun face-underline-p face &optional frame inherit
2725 This function returns non-@code{nil} if face @var{face} specifies
2726 a non-@code{nil} @code{:underline} attribute.
2727 @end defun
2728
2729 @defun face-inverse-video-p face &optional frame inherit
2730 This function returns non-@code{nil} if face @var{face} specifies
2731 a non-@code{nil} @code{:inverse-video} attribute.
2732 @end defun
2733
2734 @node Displaying Faces
2735 @subsection Displaying Faces
2736 @cindex displaying faces
2737 @cindex face merging
2738
2739 When Emacs displays a given piece of text, the visual appearance of
2740 the text may be determined by faces drawn from different sources. If
2741 these various sources together specify more than one face for a
2742 particular character, Emacs merges the attributes of the various
2743 faces. Here is the order in which Emacs merges the faces, from
2744 highest to lowest priority:
2745
2746 @itemize @bullet
2747 @item
2748 If the text consists of a special glyph, the glyph can specify a
2749 particular face. @xref{Glyphs}.
2750
2751 @item
2752 If the text lies within an active region, Emacs highlights it using
2753 the @code{region} face. @xref{Standard Faces,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs
2754 Manual}.
2755
2756 @item
2757 If the text lies within an overlay with a non-@code{nil} @code{face}
2758 property, Emacs applies the face(s) specified by that property. If
2759 the overlay has a @code{mouse-face} property and the mouse is near
2760 enough to the overlay, Emacs applies the face or face attributes
2761 specified by the @code{mouse-face} property instead. @xref{Overlay
2762 Properties}.
2763
2764 When multiple overlays cover one character, an overlay with higher
2765 priority overrides those with lower priority. @xref{Overlays}.
2766
2767 @item
2768 If the text contains a @code{face} or @code{mouse-face} property,
2769 Emacs applies the specified faces and face attributes. @xref{Special
2770 Properties}. (This is how Font Lock mode faces are applied.
2771 @xref{Font Lock Mode}.)
2772
2773 @item
2774 If the text lies within the mode line of the selected window, Emacs
2775 applies the @code{mode-line} face. For the mode line of a
2776 non-selected window, Emacs applies the @code{mode-line-inactive} face.
2777 For a header line, Emacs applies the @code{header-line} face.
2778
2779 @item
2780 If any given attribute has not been specified during the preceding
2781 steps, Emacs applies the attribute of the @code{default} face.
2782 @end itemize
2783
2784 At each stage, if a face has a valid @code{:inherit} attribute,
2785 Emacs treats any attribute with an @code{unspecified} value as having
2786 the corresponding value drawn from the parent face(s). @pxref{Face
2787 Attributes}. Note that the parent face(s) may also leave the
2788 attribute unspecified; in that case, the attribute remains unspecified
2789 at the next level of face merging.
2790
2791 @node Face Remapping
2792 @subsection Face Remapping
2793 @cindex face remapping
2794
2795 The variable @code{face-remapping-alist} is used for buffer-local or
2796 global changes in the appearance of a face. For instance, it is used
2797 to implement the @code{text-scale-adjust} command (@pxref{Text
2798 Scale,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}).
2799
2800 @defvar face-remapping-alist
2801 The value of this variable is an alist whose elements have the form
2802 @code{(@var{face} . @var{remapping})}. This causes Emacs to display
2803 any text having the face @var{face} with @var{remapping}, rather than
2804 the ordinary definition of @var{face}.
2805
2806 @var{remapping} may be any face spec suitable for a @code{face} text
2807 property: either a face (i.e., a face name or a property list of
2808 attribute/value pairs), or a list of faces. For details, see the
2809 description of the @code{face} text property in @ref{Special
2810 Properties}. @var{remapping} serves as the complete specification for
2811 the remapped face---it replaces the normal definition of @var{face},
2812 instead of modifying it.
2813
2814 If @code{face-remapping-alist} is buffer-local, its local value takes
2815 effect only within that buffer.
2816
2817 Note: face remapping is non-recursive. If @var{remapping} references
2818 the same face name @var{face}, either directly or via the
2819 @code{:inherit} attribute of some other face in @var{remapping}, that
2820 reference uses the normal definition of @var{face}. For instance, if
2821 the @code{mode-line} face is remapped using this entry in
2822 @code{face-remapping-alist}:
2823
2824 @example
2825 (mode-line italic mode-line)
2826 @end example
2827
2828 @noindent
2829 then the new definition of the @code{mode-line} face inherits from the
2830 @code{italic} face, and the @emph{normal} (non-remapped) definition of
2831 @code{mode-line} face.
2832 @end defvar
2833
2834 @cindex relative remapping, faces
2835 @cindex base remapping, faces
2836 The following functions implement a higher-level interface to
2837 @code{face-remapping-alist}. Most Lisp code should use these
2838 functions instead of setting @code{face-remapping-alist} directly, to
2839 avoid trampling on remappings applied elsewhere. These functions are
2840 intended for buffer-local remappings, so they all make
2841 @code{face-remapping-alist} buffer-local as a side-effect. They manage
2842 @code{face-remapping-alist} entries of the form
2843
2844 @example
2845 (@var{face} @var{relative-spec-1} @var{relative-spec-2} @var{...} @var{base-spec})
2846 @end example
2847
2848 @noindent
2849 where, as explained above, each of the @var{relative-spec-N} and
2850 @var{base-spec} is either a face name, or a property list of
2851 attribute/value pairs. Each of the @dfn{relative remapping} entries,
2852 @var{relative-spec-N}, is managed by the
2853 @code{face-remap-add-relative} and @code{face-remap-remove-relative}
2854 functions; these are intended for simple modifications like changing
2855 the text size. The @dfn{base remapping} entry, @var{base-spec}, has
2856 the lowest priority and is managed by the @code{face-remap-set-base}
2857 and @code{face-remap-reset-base} functions; it is intended for major
2858 modes to remap faces in the buffers they control.
2859
2860 @defun face-remap-add-relative face &rest specs
2861 This function adds the face spec in @var{specs} as relative
2862 remappings for face @var{face} in the current buffer. The remaining
2863 arguments, @var{specs}, should form either a list of face names, or a
2864 property list of attribute/value pairs.
2865
2866 The return value is a Lisp object that serves as a cookie; you can
2867 pass this object as an argument to @code{face-remap-remove-relative}
2868 if you need to remove the remapping later.
2869
2870 @example
2871 ;; Remap the 'escape-glyph' face into a combination
2872 ;; of the 'highlight' and 'italic' faces:
2873 (face-remap-add-relative 'escape-glyph 'highlight 'italic)
2874
2875 ;; Increase the size of the 'default' face by 50%:
2876 (face-remap-add-relative 'default :height 1.5)
2877 @end example
2878 @end defun
2879
2880 @defun face-remap-remove-relative cookie
2881 This function removes a relative remapping previously added by
2882 @code{face-remap-add-relative}. @var{cookie} should be the Lisp
2883 object returned by @code{face-remap-add-relative} when the remapping
2884 was added.
2885 @end defun
2886
2887 @defun face-remap-set-base face &rest specs
2888 This function sets the base remapping of @var{face} in the current
2889 buffer to @var{specs}. If @var{specs} is empty, the default base
2890 remapping is restored, similar to calling @code{face-remap-reset-base}
2891 (see below); note that this is different from @var{specs} containing a
2892 single value @code{nil}, which has the opposite result (the global
2893 definition of @var{face} is ignored).
2894
2895 This overwrites the default @var{base-spec}, which inherits the global
2896 face definition, so it is up to the caller to add such inheritance if
2897 so desired.
2898 @end defun
2899
2900 @defun face-remap-reset-base face
2901 This function sets the base remapping of @var{face} to its default
2902 value, which inherits from @var{face}'s global definition.
2903 @end defun
2904
2905 @node Face Functions
2906 @subsection Functions for Working with Faces
2907
2908 Here are additional functions for creating and working with faces.
2909
2910 @defun face-list
2911 This function returns a list of all defined face names.
2912 @end defun
2913
2914 @defun face-id face
2915 This function returns the @dfn{face number} of face @var{face}. This
2916 is a number that uniquely identifies a face at low levels within
2917 Emacs. It is seldom necessary to refer to a face by its face number.
2918 @end defun
2919
2920 @defun face-documentation face
2921 This function returns the documentation string of face @var{face}, or
2922 @code{nil} if none was specified for it.
2923 @end defun
2924
2925 @defun face-equal face1 face2 &optional frame
2926 This returns @code{t} if the faces @var{face1} and @var{face2} have the
2927 same attributes for display.
2928 @end defun
2929
2930 @defun face-differs-from-default-p face &optional frame
2931 This returns non-@code{nil} if the face @var{face} displays
2932 differently from the default face.
2933 @end defun
2934
2935 @cindex face alias
2936 @cindex alias, for faces
2937 A @dfn{face alias} provides an equivalent name for a face. You can
2938 define a face alias by giving the alias symbol the @code{face-alias}
2939 property, with a value of the target face name. The following example
2940 makes @code{modeline} an alias for the @code{mode-line} face.
2941
2942 @example
2943 (put 'modeline 'face-alias 'mode-line)
2944 @end example
2945
2946 @defmac define-obsolete-face-alias obsolete-face current-face when
2947 This macro defines @code{obsolete-face} as an alias for
2948 @var{current-face}, and also marks it as obsolete, indicating that it
2949 may be removed in future. @var{when} should be a string indicating
2950 when @code{obsolete-face} was made obsolete (usually a version number
2951 string).
2952 @end defmac
2953
2954 @node Auto Faces
2955 @subsection Automatic Face Assignment
2956 @cindex automatic face assignment
2957 @cindex faces, automatic choice
2958
2959 This hook is used for automatically assigning faces to text in the
2960 buffer. It is part of the implementation of Jit-Lock mode, used by
2961 Font-Lock.
2962
2963 @defvar fontification-functions
2964 This variable holds a list of functions that are called by Emacs
2965 redisplay as needed, just before doing redisplay. They are called even
2966 when Font Lock Mode isn't enabled. When Font Lock Mode is enabled, this
2967 variable usually holds just one function, @code{jit-lock-function}.
2968
2969 The functions are called in the order listed, with one argument, a
2970 buffer position @var{pos}. Collectively they should attempt to assign
2971 faces to the text in the current buffer starting at @var{pos}.
2972
2973 The functions should record the faces they assign by setting the
2974 @code{face} property. They should also add a non-@code{nil}
2975 @code{fontified} property to all the text they have assigned faces to.
2976 That property tells redisplay that faces have been assigned to that text
2977 already.
2978
2979 It is probably a good idea for the functions to do nothing if the
2980 character after @var{pos} already has a non-@code{nil} @code{fontified}
2981 property, but this is not required. If one function overrides the
2982 assignments made by a previous one, the properties after the last
2983 function finishes are the ones that really matter.
2984
2985 For efficiency, we recommend writing these functions so that they
2986 usually assign faces to around 400 to 600 characters at each call.
2987 @end defvar
2988
2989 @node Basic Faces
2990 @subsection Basic Faces
2991 @cindex basic faces
2992
2993 If your Emacs Lisp program needs to assign some faces to text, it is
2994 often a good idea to use certain existing faces or inherit from them,
2995 rather than defining entirely new faces. This way, if other users
2996 have customized the basic faces to give Emacs a certain look, your
2997 program will fit in without additional customization.
2998
2999 Some of the basic faces defined in Emacs are listed below. In
3000 addition to these, you might want to make use of the Font Lock faces
3001 for syntactic highlighting, if highlighting is not already handled by
3002 Font Lock mode, or if some Font Lock faces are not in use.
3003 @xref{Faces for Font Lock}.
3004
3005 @table @code
3006 @item default
3007 The default face, whose attributes are all specified. All other faces
3008 implicitly inherit from it: any unspecified attribute defaults to the
3009 attribute on this face (@pxref{Face Attributes}).
3010
3011 @item bold
3012 @itemx italic
3013 @itemx bold-italic
3014 @itemx underline
3015 @itemx fixed-pitch
3016 @itemx variable-pitch
3017 These have the attributes indicated by their names (e.g., @code{bold}
3018 has a bold @code{:weight} attribute), with all other attributes
3019 unspecified (and so given by @code{default}).
3020
3021 @item shadow
3022 For dimmed-out text. For example, it is used for the ignored
3023 part of a filename in the minibuffer (@pxref{Minibuffer File,,
3024 Minibuffers for File Names, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}).
3025
3026 @item link
3027 @itemx link-visited
3028 For clickable text buttons that send the user to a different
3029 buffer or location.
3030
3031 @item highlight
3032 For stretches of text that should temporarily stand out. For example,
3033 it is commonly assigned to the @code{mouse-face} property for cursor
3034 highlighting (@pxref{Special Properties}).
3035
3036 @item match
3037 @itemx isearch
3038 @itemx lazy-highlight
3039 For text matching (respectively) permanent search matches, interactive
3040 search matches, and lazy highlighting other matches than the current
3041 interactive one.
3042
3043 @item error
3044 @itemx warning
3045 @itemx success
3046 For text concerning errors, warnings, or successes. For example,
3047 these are used for messages in @file{*Compilation*} buffers.
3048 @end table
3049
3050 @node Font Selection
3051 @subsection Font Selection
3052 @cindex font selection
3053 @cindex selecting a font
3054
3055 Before Emacs can draw a character on a graphical display, it must
3056 select a @dfn{font} for that character@footnote{In this context, the
3057 term @dfn{font} has nothing to do with Font Lock (@pxref{Font Lock
3058 Mode}).}. @xref{Fonts,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}. Normally,
3059 Emacs automatically chooses a font based on the faces assigned to that
3060 character---specifically, the face attributes @code{:family},
3061 @code{:weight}, @code{:slant}, and @code{:width} (@pxref{Face
3062 Attributes}). The choice of font also depends on the character to be
3063 displayed; some fonts can only display a limited set of characters.
3064 If no available font exactly fits the requirements, Emacs looks for
3065 the @dfn{closest matching font}. The variables in this section
3066 control how Emacs makes this selection.
3067
3068 @defopt face-font-family-alternatives
3069 If a given family is specified but does not exist, this variable
3070 specifies alternative font families to try. Each element should have
3071 this form:
3072
3073 @example
3074 (@var{family} @var{alternate-families}@dots{})
3075 @end example
3076
3077 If @var{family} is specified but not available, Emacs will try the other
3078 families given in @var{alternate-families}, one by one, until it finds a
3079 family that does exist.
3080 @end defopt
3081
3082 @defopt face-font-selection-order
3083 If there is no font that exactly matches all desired face attributes
3084 (@code{:width}, @code{:height}, @code{:weight}, and @code{:slant}),
3085 this variable specifies the order in which these attributes should be
3086 considered when selecting the closest matching font. The value should
3087 be a list containing those four attribute symbols, in order of
3088 decreasing importance. The default is @code{(:width :height :weight
3089 :slant)}.
3090
3091 Font selection first finds the best available matches for the first
3092 attribute in the list; then, among the fonts which are best in that
3093 way, it searches for the best matches in the second attribute, and so
3094 on.
3095
3096 The attributes @code{:weight} and @code{:width} have symbolic values in
3097 a range centered around @code{normal}. Matches that are more extreme
3098 (farther from @code{normal}) are somewhat preferred to matches that are
3099 less extreme (closer to @code{normal}); this is designed to ensure that
3100 non-normal faces contrast with normal ones, whenever possible.
3101
3102 One example of a case where this variable makes a difference is when the
3103 default font has no italic equivalent. With the default ordering, the
3104 @code{italic} face will use a non-italic font that is similar to the
3105 default one. But if you put @code{:slant} before @code{:height}, the
3106 @code{italic} face will use an italic font, even if its height is not
3107 quite right.
3108 @end defopt
3109
3110 @defopt face-font-registry-alternatives
3111 This variable lets you specify alternative font registries to try, if a
3112 given registry is specified and doesn't exist. Each element should have
3113 this form:
3114
3115 @example
3116 (@var{registry} @var{alternate-registries}@dots{})
3117 @end example
3118
3119 If @var{registry} is specified but not available, Emacs will try the
3120 other registries given in @var{alternate-registries}, one by one,
3121 until it finds a registry that does exist.
3122 @end defopt
3123
3124 @cindex scalable fonts
3125 Emacs can make use of scalable fonts, but by default it does not use
3126 them.
3127
3128 @defopt scalable-fonts-allowed
3129 This variable controls which scalable fonts to use. A value of
3130 @code{nil}, the default, means do not use scalable fonts. @code{t}
3131 means to use any scalable font that seems appropriate for the text.
3132
3133 Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. Then a
3134 scalable font is enabled for use if its name matches any regular
3135 expression in the list. For example,
3136
3137 @example
3138 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("iso10646-1$"))
3139 @end example
3140
3141 @noindent
3142 allows the use of scalable fonts with registry @code{iso10646-1}.
3143 @end defopt
3144
3145 @defvar face-font-rescale-alist
3146 This variable specifies scaling for certain faces. Its value should
3147 be a list of elements of the form
3148
3149 @example
3150 (@var{fontname-regexp} . @var{scale-factor})
3151 @end example
3152
3153 If @var{fontname-regexp} matches the font name that is about to be
3154 used, this says to choose a larger similar font according to the
3155 factor @var{scale-factor}. You would use this feature to normalize
3156 the font size if certain fonts are bigger or smaller than their
3157 nominal heights and widths would suggest.
3158 @end defvar
3159
3160 @node Font Lookup
3161 @subsection Looking Up Fonts
3162 @cindex font lookup
3163 @cindex looking up fonts
3164
3165 @defun x-list-fonts name &optional reference-face frame maximum width
3166 This function returns a list of available font names that match
3167 @var{name}. @var{name} should be a string containing a font name in
3168 either the Fontconfig, GTK, or XLFD format (@pxref{Fonts,,, emacs, The
3169 GNU Emacs Manual}). Within an XLFD string, wildcard characters may be
3170 used: the @samp{*} character matches any substring, and the @samp{?}
3171 character matches any single character. Case is ignored when matching
3172 font names.
3173
3174 If the optional arguments @var{reference-face} and @var{frame} are
3175 specified, the returned list includes only fonts that are the same
3176 size as @var{reference-face} (a face name) currently is on the frame
3177 @var{frame}.
3178
3179 The optional argument @var{maximum} sets a limit on how many fonts to
3180 return. If it is non-@code{nil}, then the return value is truncated
3181 after the first @var{maximum} matching fonts. Specifying a small
3182 value for @var{maximum} can make this function much faster, in cases
3183 where many fonts match the pattern.
3184
3185 The optional argument @var{width} specifies a desired font width. If
3186 it is non-@code{nil}, the function only returns those fonts whose
3187 characters are (on average) @var{width} times as wide as
3188 @var{reference-face}.
3189 @end defun
3190
3191 @defun x-family-fonts &optional family frame
3192 This function returns a list describing the available fonts for family
3193 @var{family} on @var{frame}. If @var{family} is omitted or @code{nil},
3194 this list applies to all families, and therefore, it contains all
3195 available fonts. Otherwise, @var{family} must be a string; it may
3196 contain the wildcards @samp{?} and @samp{*}.
3197
3198 The list describes the display that @var{frame} is on; if @var{frame} is
3199 omitted or @code{nil}, it applies to the selected frame's display
3200 (@pxref{Input Focus}).
3201
3202 Each element in the list is a vector of the following form:
3203
3204 @example
3205 [@var{family} @var{width} @var{point-size} @var{weight} @var{slant}
3206 @var{fixed-p} @var{full} @var{registry-and-encoding}]
3207 @end example
3208
3209 The first five elements correspond to face attributes; if you
3210 specify these attributes for a face, it will use this font.
3211
3212 The last three elements give additional information about the font.
3213 @var{fixed-p} is non-@code{nil} if the font is fixed-pitch.
3214 @var{full} is the full name of the font, and
3215 @var{registry-and-encoding} is a string giving the registry and
3216 encoding of the font.
3217 @end defun
3218
3219 @node Fontsets
3220 @subsection Fontsets
3221 @cindex fontset
3222
3223 A @dfn{fontset} is a list of fonts, each assigned to a range of
3224 character codes. An individual font cannot display the whole range of
3225 characters that Emacs supports, but a fontset can. Fontsets have names,
3226 just as fonts do, and you can use a fontset name in place of a font name
3227 when you specify the font for a frame or a face. Here is
3228 information about defining a fontset under Lisp program control.
3229
3230 @defun create-fontset-from-fontset-spec fontset-spec &optional style-variant-p noerror
3231 This function defines a new fontset according to the specification
3232 string @var{fontset-spec}. The string should have this format:
3233
3234 @smallexample
3235 @var{fontpattern}, @r{[}@var{charset}:@var{font}@r{]@dots{}}
3236 @end smallexample
3237
3238 @noindent
3239 Whitespace characters before and after the commas are ignored.
3240
3241 The first part of the string, @var{fontpattern}, should have the form of
3242 a standard X font name, except that the last two fields should be
3243 @samp{fontset-@var{alias}}.
3244
3245 The new fontset has two names, one long and one short. The long name is
3246 @var{fontpattern} in its entirety. The short name is
3247 @samp{fontset-@var{alias}}. You can refer to the fontset by either
3248 name. If a fontset with the same name already exists, an error is
3249 signaled, unless @var{noerror} is non-@code{nil}, in which case this
3250 function does nothing.
3251
3252 If optional argument @var{style-variant-p} is non-@code{nil}, that says
3253 to create bold, italic and bold-italic variants of the fontset as well.
3254 These variant fontsets do not have a short name, only a long one, which
3255 is made by altering @var{fontpattern} to indicate the bold and/or italic
3256 status.
3257
3258 The specification string also says which fonts to use in the fontset.
3259 See below for the details.
3260 @end defun
3261
3262 The construct @samp{@var{charset}:@var{font}} specifies which font to
3263 use (in this fontset) for one particular character set. Here,
3264 @var{charset} is the name of a character set, and @var{font} is the font
3265 to use for that character set. You can use this construct any number of
3266 times in the specification string.
3267
3268 For the remaining character sets, those that you don't specify
3269 explicitly, Emacs chooses a font based on @var{fontpattern}: it replaces
3270 @samp{fontset-@var{alias}} with a value that names one character set.
3271 For the @acronym{ASCII} character set, @samp{fontset-@var{alias}} is replaced
3272 with @samp{ISO8859-1}.
3273
3274 In addition, when several consecutive fields are wildcards, Emacs
3275 collapses them into a single wildcard. This is to prevent use of
3276 auto-scaled fonts. Fonts made by scaling larger fonts are not usable
3277 for editing, and scaling a smaller font is not useful because it is
3278 better to use the smaller font in its own size, which Emacs does.
3279
3280 Thus if @var{fontpattern} is this,
3281
3282 @example
3283 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
3284 @end example
3285
3286 @noindent
3287 the font specification for @acronym{ASCII} characters would be this:
3288
3289 @example
3290 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
3291 @end example
3292
3293 @noindent
3294 and the font specification for Chinese GB2312 characters would be this:
3295
3296 @example
3297 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-gb2312*-*
3298 @end example
3299
3300 You may not have any Chinese font matching the above font
3301 specification. Most X distributions include only Chinese fonts that
3302 have @samp{song ti} or @samp{fangsong ti} in the @var{family} field. In
3303 such a case, @samp{Fontset-@var{n}} can be specified as below:
3304
3305 @smallexample
3306 Emacs.Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24,\
3307 chinese-gb2312:-*-*-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-gb2312*-*
3308 @end smallexample
3309
3310 @noindent
3311 Then, the font specifications for all but Chinese GB2312 characters have
3312 @samp{fixed} in the @var{family} field, and the font specification for
3313 Chinese GB2312 characters has a wild card @samp{*} in the @var{family}
3314 field.
3315
3316 @defun set-fontset-font name character font-spec &optional frame add
3317 This function modifies the existing fontset @var{name} to use the font
3318 matching with @var{font-spec} for the specified @var{character}.
3319
3320 If @var{name} is @code{nil}, this function modifies the fontset of the
3321 selected frame or that of @var{frame} if @var{frame} is not
3322 @code{nil}.
3323
3324 If @var{name} is @code{t}, this function modifies the default
3325 fontset, whose short name is @samp{fontset-default}.
3326
3327 In addition to specifying a single codepoint, @var{character} may be a
3328 cons @code{(@var{from} . @var{to})}, where @var{from} and @var{to} are
3329 character codepoints. In that case, use @var{font-spec} for all the
3330 characters in the range @var{from} and @var{to} (inclusive).
3331
3332 @var{character} may be a charset. In that case, use
3333 @var{font-spec} for all character in the charsets.
3334
3335 @var{character} may be a script name. In that case, use
3336 @var{font-spec} for all character in the charsets.
3337
3338 @var{font-spec} may be a font-spec object created by the function
3339 @code{font-spec} (@pxref{Low-Level Font}).
3340
3341 @var{font-spec} may be a cons; @code{(@var{family} . @var{registry})},
3342 where @var{family} is a family name of a font (possibly including a
3343 foundry name at the head), @var{registry} is a registry name of a font
3344 (possibly including an encoding name at the tail).
3345
3346 @var{font-spec} may be a font name string.
3347
3348 @var{font-spec} may be @code{nil}, which explicitly specifies that
3349 there's no font for the specified @var{character}. This is useful,
3350 for example, to avoid expensive system-wide search for fonts for
3351 characters that have no glyphs, like those from the Unicode Private
3352 Use Area (PUA).
3353
3354 The optional argument @var{add}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies how to
3355 add @var{font-spec} to the font specifications previously set. If it
3356 is @code{prepend}, @var{font-spec} is prepended. If it is
3357 @code{append}, @var{font-spec} is appended. By default,
3358 @var{font-spec} overrides the previous settings.
3359
3360 For instance, this changes the default fontset to use a font of which
3361 family name is @samp{Kochi Gothic} for all characters belonging to
3362 the charset @code{japanese-jisx0208}.
3363
3364 @smallexample
3365 (set-fontset-font t 'japanese-jisx0208
3366 (font-spec :family "Kochi Gothic"))
3367 @end smallexample
3368 @end defun
3369
3370 @defun char-displayable-p char
3371 This function returns @code{t} if Emacs ought to be able to display
3372 @var{char}. More precisely, if the selected frame's fontset has a
3373 font to display the character set that @var{char} belongs to.
3374
3375 Fontsets can specify a font on a per-character basis; when the fontset
3376 does that, this function's value may not be accurate.
3377 @end defun
3378
3379 @node Low-Level Font
3380 @subsection Low-Level Font Representation
3381 @cindex font property
3382
3383 Normally, it is not necessary to manipulate fonts directly. In case
3384 you need to do so, this section explains how.
3385
3386 In Emacs Lisp, fonts are represented using three different Lisp
3387 object types: @dfn{font objects}, @dfn{font specs}, and @dfn{font
3388 entities}.
3389
3390 @defun fontp object &optional type
3391 Return @code{t} if @var{object} is a font object, font spec, or font
3392 entity. Otherwise, return @code{nil}.
3393
3394 The optional argument @var{type}, if non-@code{nil}, determines the
3395 exact type of Lisp object to check for. In that case, @var{type}
3396 should be one of @code{font-object}, @code{font-spec}, or
3397 @code{font-entity}.
3398 @end defun
3399
3400 @cindex font object
3401 A font object is a Lisp object that represents a font that Emacs has
3402 @dfn{opened}. Font objects cannot be modified in Lisp, but they can
3403 be inspected.
3404
3405 @defun font-at position &optional window string
3406 Return the font object that is being used to display the character at
3407 position @var{position} in the window @var{window}. If @var{window}
3408 is @code{nil}, it defaults to the selected window. If @var{string} is
3409 @code{nil}, @var{position} specifies a position in the current buffer;
3410 otherwise, @var{string} should be a string, and @var{position}
3411 specifies a position in that string.
3412 @end defun
3413
3414 @cindex font spec
3415 A font spec is a Lisp object that contains a set of specifications
3416 that can be used to find a font. More than one font may match the
3417 specifications in a font spec.
3418
3419 @defun font-spec &rest arguments
3420 Return a new font spec using the specifications in @var{arguments},
3421 which should come in @code{property}-@code{value} pairs. The possible
3422 specifications are as follows:
3423
3424 @table @code
3425 @item :name
3426 The font name (a string), in either XLFD, Fontconfig, or GTK format.
3427 @xref{Fonts,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
3428
3429 @item :family
3430 @itemx :foundry
3431 @itemx :weight
3432 @itemx :slant
3433 @itemx :width
3434 These have the same meanings as the face attributes of the same name.
3435 @xref{Face Attributes}.
3436
3437 @item :size
3438 The font size---either a non-negative integer that specifies the pixel
3439 size, or a floating-point number that specifies the point size.
3440
3441 @item :adstyle
3442 Additional typographic style information for the font, such as
3443 @samp{sans}. The value should be a string or a symbol.
3444
3445 @cindex font registry
3446 @item :registry
3447 The charset registry and encoding of the font, such as
3448 @samp{iso8859-1}. The value should be a string or a symbol.
3449
3450 @item :script
3451 The script that the font must support (a symbol).
3452
3453 @item :lang
3454 The language that the font should support. The value should be a
3455 symbol whose name is a two-letter ISO-639 language name. On X, the
3456 value is matched against the ``Additional Style'' field of the XLFD
3457 name of a font, if it is non-empty. On MS-Windows, fonts matching the
3458 spec are required to support codepages needed for the language.
3459 Currently, only a small set of CJK languages is supported with this
3460 property: @samp{ja}, @samp{ko}, and @samp{zh}.
3461
3462 @item :otf
3463 @cindex OpenType font
3464 The font must be an OpenType font that supports these OpenType
3465 features, provided Emacs is compiled with a library, such as
3466 @samp{libotf} on GNU/Linux, that supports complex text layout for
3467 scripts which need that. The value must be a list of the form
3468
3469 @smallexample
3470 @code{(@var{script-tag} @var{langsys-tag} @var{gsub} @var{gpos})}
3471 @end smallexample
3472
3473 where @var{script-tag} is the OpenType script tag symbol;
3474 @var{langsys-tag} is the OpenType language system tag symbol, or
3475 @code{nil} to use the default language system; @code{gsub} is a list
3476 of OpenType GSUB feature tag symbols, or @code{nil} if none is
3477 required; and @code{gpos} is a list of OpenType GPOS feature tag
3478 symbols, or @code{nil} if none is required. If @code{gsub} or
3479 @code{gpos} is a list, a @code{nil} element in that list means that
3480 the font must not match any of the remaining tag symbols. The
3481 @code{gpos} element may be omitted.
3482 @end table
3483 @end defun
3484
3485 @defun font-put font-spec property value
3486 Set the font property @var{property} in the font-spec @var{font-spec}
3487 to @var{value}.
3488 @end defun
3489
3490 @cindex font entity
3491 A font entity is a reference to a font that need not be open. Its
3492 properties are intermediate between a font object and a font spec:
3493 like a font object, and unlike a font spec, it refers to a single,
3494 specific font. Unlike a font object, creating a font entity does not
3495 load the contents of that font into computer memory. Emacs may open
3496 multiple font objects of different sizes from a single font entity
3497 referring to a scalable font.
3498
3499 @defun find-font font-spec &optional frame
3500 This function returns a font entity that best matches the font spec
3501 @var{font-spec} on frame @var{frame}. If @var{frame} is @code{nil},
3502 it defaults to the selected frame.
3503 @end defun
3504
3505 @defun list-fonts font-spec &optional frame num prefer
3506 This function returns a list of all font entities that match the font
3507 spec @var{font-spec}.
3508
3509 The optional argument @var{frame}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the
3510 frame on which the fonts are to be displayed. The optional argument
3511 @var{num}, if non-@code{nil}, should be an integer that specifies the
3512 maximum length of the returned list. The optional argument
3513 @var{prefer}, if non-@code{nil}, should be another font spec, which is
3514 used to control the order of the returned list; the returned font
3515 entities are sorted in order of decreasing closeness to that font
3516 spec.
3517 @end defun
3518
3519 If you call @code{set-face-attribute} and pass a font spec, font
3520 entity, or font name string as the value of the @code{:font}
3521 attribute, Emacs opens the best matching font that is available
3522 for display. It then stores the corresponding font object as the
3523 actual value of the @code{:font} attribute for that face.
3524
3525 The following functions can be used to obtain information about a
3526 font. For these functions, the @var{font} argument can be a font
3527 object, a font entity, or a font spec.
3528
3529 @defun font-get font property
3530 This function returns the value of the font property @var{property}
3531 for @var{font}.
3532
3533 If @var{font} is a font spec and the font spec does not specify
3534 @var{property}, the return value is @code{nil}. If @var{font} is a
3535 font object or font entity, the value for the @var{:script} property
3536 may be a list of scripts supported by the font.
3537 @end defun
3538
3539 @defun font-face-attributes font &optional frame
3540 This function returns a list of face attributes corresponding to
3541 @var{font}. The optional argument @var{frame} specifies the frame on
3542 which the font is to be displayed. If it is @code{nil}, the selected
3543 frame is used. The return value has the form
3544
3545 @smallexample
3546 (:family @var{family} :height @var{height} :weight @var{weight}
3547 :slant @var{slant} :width @var{width})
3548 @end smallexample
3549
3550 where the values of @var{family}, @var{height}, @var{weight},
3551 @var{slant}, and @var{width} are face attribute values. Some of these
3552 key-attribute pairs may be omitted from the list if they are not
3553 specified by @var{font}.
3554 @end defun
3555
3556 @defun font-xlfd-name font &optional fold-wildcards
3557 This function returns the XLFD (X Logical Font Descriptor), a string,
3558 matching @var{font}. @xref{Fonts,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for
3559 information about XLFDs. If the name is too long for an XLFD (which
3560 can contain at most 255 characters), the function returns @code{nil}.
3561
3562 If the optional argument @var{fold-wildcards} is non-@code{nil},
3563 consecutive wildcards in the XLFD are folded into one.
3564 @end defun
3565
3566 The following two functions return important information about a font.
3567
3568 @defun font-info name &optional frame
3569 This function returns information about a font specified by its
3570 @var{name}, a string, as it is used on @var{frame}. If @var{frame} is
3571 omitted or @code{nil}, it defaults to the selected frame.
3572
3573 The value returned by the function is a vector of the form
3574 @code{[@var{opened-name} @var{full-name} @var{size} @var{height}
3575 @var{baseline-offset} @var{relative-compose} @var{default-ascent}
3576 @var{max-width} @var{ascent} @var{descent} @var{space-width}
3577 @var{average-width} @var{filename} @var{capability}]}. Here's the
3578 description of each components of this vector:
3579
3580 @table @var
3581 @item opened-name
3582 The name used to open the font, a string.
3583
3584 @item full-name
3585 The full name of the font, a string.
3586
3587 @item size
3588 The pixel size of the font.
3589
3590 @item height
3591 The height of the font in pixels.
3592
3593 @item baseline-offset
3594 The offset in pixels from the @acronym{ASCII} baseline, positive
3595 upward.
3596
3597 @item relative-compose
3598 @itemx default-ascent
3599 Numbers controlling how to compose characters.
3600
3601 @item ascent
3602 @itemx descent
3603 The ascent and descent of this font. The sum of these two numbers
3604 should be equal to the value of @var{height} above.
3605
3606 @item space-width
3607 The width, in pixels, of the font's space character.
3608
3609 @item average-width
3610 The average width of the font characters. If this is zero, Emacs uses
3611 the value of @var{space-width} instead, when it calculates text layout
3612 on display.
3613
3614 @item filename
3615 The file name of the font as a string. This can be @code{nil} if the
3616 font back-end does not provide a way to find out the font's file name.
3617
3618 @item capability
3619 A list whose first element is a symbol representing the font type, one
3620 of @code{x}, @code{opentype}, @code{truetype}, @code{type1},
3621 @code{pcf}, or @code{bdf}. For OpenType fonts, the list includes 2
3622 additional elements describing the @sc{gsub} and @sc{gpos} features
3623 supported by the font. Each of these elements is a list of the form
3624 @code{((@var{script} (@var{langsys} @var{feature} @dots{}) @dots{})
3625 @dots{})}, where @var{script} is a symbol representing an OpenType
3626 script tag, @var{langsys} is a symbol representing an OpenType langsys
3627 tag (or @code{nil}, which stands for the default langsys), and each
3628 @var{feature} is a symbol representing an OpenType feature tag.
3629 @end table
3630 @end defun
3631
3632 @defun query-font font-object
3633 This function returns information about a @var{font-object}. (This is
3634 in contrast to @code{font-info}, which takes the font name, a string,
3635 as its argument.)
3636
3637 The value returned by the function is a vector of the form
3638 @code{[@var{name} @var{filename} @var{pixel-size} @var{max-width}
3639 @var{ascent} @var{descent} @var{space-width} @var{average-width}
3640 @var{capability}]}. Here's the description of each components of this
3641 vector:
3642
3643 @table @var
3644 @item name
3645 The font name, a string.
3646
3647 @item filename
3648 The file name of the font as a string. This can be @code{nil} if the
3649 font back-end does not provide a way to find out the font's file name.
3650
3651 @item pixel-size
3652 The pixel size of the font used to open the font.
3653
3654 @item max-width
3655 The maximum advance width of the font.
3656
3657 @item ascent
3658 @itemx descent
3659 The ascent and descent of this font. The sum of these two numbers
3660 gives the font height.
3661
3662 @item space-width
3663 The width, in pixels, of the font's space character.
3664
3665 @item average-width
3666 The average width of the font characters. If this is zero, Emacs uses
3667 the value of @var{space-width} instead, when it calculates text layout
3668 on display.
3669
3670 @item capability
3671 A list whose first element is a symbol representing the font type, one
3672 of @code{x}, @code{opentype}, @code{truetype}, @code{type1},
3673 @code{pcf}, or @code{bdf}. For OpenType fonts, the list includes 2
3674 additional elements describing the @sc{gsub} and @sc{gpos} features
3675 supported by the font. Each of these elements is a list of the form
3676 @code{((@var{script} (@var{langsys} @var{feature} @dots{}) @dots{})
3677 @dots{})}, where @var{script} is a symbol representing an OpenType
3678 script tag, @var{langsys} is a symbol representing an OpenType langsys
3679 tag (or @code{nil}, which stands for the default langsys), and each
3680 @var{feature} is a symbol representing an OpenType feature tag.
3681 @end table
3682 @end defun
3683
3684 @cindex font information for layout
3685 The following four functions return size information about fonts used
3686 by various faces, allowing various layout considerations in Lisp
3687 programs. These functions take face remapping into consideration,
3688 returning information about the remapped face, if the face in question
3689 was remapped. @xref{Face Remapping}.
3690
3691 @defun default-font-width
3692 This function returns the average width in pixels of the font used by
3693 the current buffer's default face.
3694 @end defun
3695
3696 @defun default-font-height
3697 This function returns the height in pixels of the font used by the
3698 current buffer's default face.
3699 @end defun
3700
3701 @defun window-font-width &optional window face
3702 This function returns the average width in pixels for the font used by
3703 @var{face} in @var{window}. The specified @var{window} must be a live
3704 window. If @code{nil} or omitted, @var{window} defaults to the
3705 selected window, and @var{face} defaults to the default face in
3706 @var{window}.
3707 @end defun
3708
3709 @defun window-font-height &optional window face
3710 This function returns the height in pixels for the font used by
3711 @var{face} in @var{window}. The specified @var{window} must be a live
3712 window. If @code{nil} or omitted, @var{window} defaults to the
3713 selected window, and @var{face} defaults to the default face in
3714 @var{window}.
3715 @end defun
3716
3717 @node Fringes
3718 @section Fringes
3719 @cindex fringes
3720
3721 On graphical displays, Emacs draws @dfn{fringes} next to each
3722 window: thin vertical strips down the sides which can display bitmaps
3723 indicating truncation, continuation, horizontal scrolling, and so on.
3724
3725 @menu
3726 * Fringe Size/Pos:: Specifying where to put the window fringes.
3727 * Fringe Indicators:: Displaying indicator icons in the window fringes.
3728 * Fringe Cursors:: Displaying cursors in the right fringe.
3729 * Fringe Bitmaps:: Specifying bitmaps for fringe indicators.
3730 * Customizing Bitmaps:: Specifying your own bitmaps to use in the fringes.
3731 * Overlay Arrow:: Display of an arrow to indicate position.
3732 @end menu
3733
3734 @node Fringe Size/Pos
3735 @subsection Fringe Size and Position
3736
3737 The following buffer-local variables control the position and width
3738 of fringes in windows showing that buffer.
3739
3740 @defvar fringes-outside-margins
3741 The fringes normally appear between the display margins and the window
3742 text. If the value is non-@code{nil}, they appear outside the display
3743 margins. @xref{Display Margins}.
3744 @end defvar
3745
3746 @defvar left-fringe-width
3747 This variable, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the width of the left
3748 fringe in pixels. A value of @code{nil} means to use the left fringe
3749 width from the window's frame.
3750 @end defvar
3751
3752 @defvar right-fringe-width
3753 This variable, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the width of the right
3754 fringe in pixels. A value of @code{nil} means to use the right fringe
3755 width from the window's frame.
3756 @end defvar
3757
3758 Any buffer which does not specify values for these variables uses
3759 the values specified by the @code{left-fringe} and @code{right-fringe}
3760 frame parameters (@pxref{Layout Parameters}).
3761
3762 The above variables actually take effect via the function
3763 @code{set-window-buffer} (@pxref{Buffers and Windows}), which calls
3764 @code{set-window-fringes} as a subroutine. If you change one of these
3765 variables, the fringe display is not updated in existing windows
3766 showing the buffer, unless you call @code{set-window-buffer} again in
3767 each affected window. You can also use @code{set-window-fringes} to
3768 control the fringe display in individual windows.
3769
3770 @defun set-window-fringes window left &optional right outside-margins
3771 This function sets the fringe widths of window @var{window}.
3772 If @var{window} is @code{nil}, the selected window is used.
3773
3774 The argument @var{left} specifies the width in pixels of the left
3775 fringe, and likewise @var{right} for the right fringe. A value of
3776 @code{nil} for either one stands for the default width. If
3777 @var{outside-margins} is non-@code{nil}, that specifies that fringes
3778 should appear outside of the display margins.
3779 @end defun
3780
3781 @defun window-fringes &optional window
3782 This function returns information about the fringes of a window
3783 @var{window}. If @var{window} is omitted or @code{nil}, the selected
3784 window is used. The value has the form @code{(@var{left-width}
3785 @var{right-width} @var{outside-margins})}.
3786 @end defun
3787
3788
3789 @node Fringe Indicators
3790 @subsection Fringe Indicators
3791 @cindex fringe indicators
3792 @cindex indicators, fringe
3793
3794 @dfn{Fringe indicators} are tiny icons displayed in the window
3795 fringe to indicate truncated or continued lines, buffer boundaries,
3796 etc.
3797
3798 @defopt indicate-empty-lines
3799 @cindex fringes, and empty line indication
3800 @cindex empty lines, indicating
3801 When this is non-@code{nil}, Emacs displays a special glyph in the
3802 fringe of each empty line at the end of the buffer, on graphical
3803 displays. @xref{Fringes}. This variable is automatically
3804 buffer-local in every buffer.
3805 @end defopt
3806
3807 @defopt indicate-buffer-boundaries
3808 @cindex buffer boundaries, indicating
3809 This buffer-local variable controls how the buffer boundaries and
3810 window scrolling are indicated in the window fringes.
3811
3812 Emacs can indicate the buffer boundaries---that is, the first and last
3813 line in the buffer---with angle icons when they appear on the screen.
3814 In addition, Emacs can display an up-arrow in the fringe to show
3815 that there is text above the screen, and a down-arrow to show
3816 there is text below the screen.
3817
3818 There are three kinds of basic values:
3819
3820 @table @asis
3821 @item @code{nil}
3822 Don't display any of these fringe icons.
3823 @item @code{left}
3824 Display the angle icons and arrows in the left fringe.
3825 @item @code{right}
3826 Display the angle icons and arrows in the right fringe.
3827 @item any non-alist
3828 Display the angle icons in the left fringe
3829 and don't display the arrows.
3830 @end table
3831
3832 Otherwise the value should be an alist that specifies which fringe
3833 indicators to display and where. Each element of the alist should
3834 have the form @code{(@var{indicator} . @var{position})}. Here,
3835 @var{indicator} is one of @code{top}, @code{bottom}, @code{up},
3836 @code{down}, and @code{t} (which covers all the icons not yet
3837 specified), while @var{position} is one of @code{left}, @code{right}
3838 and @code{nil}.
3839
3840 For example, @code{((top . left) (t . right))} places the top angle
3841 bitmap in left fringe, and the bottom angle bitmap as well as both
3842 arrow bitmaps in right fringe. To show the angle bitmaps in the left
3843 fringe, and no arrow bitmaps, use @code{((top . left) (bottom . left))}.
3844 @end defopt
3845
3846 @defvar fringe-indicator-alist
3847 This buffer-local variable specifies the mapping from logical fringe
3848 indicators to the actual bitmaps displayed in the window fringes. The
3849 value is an alist of elements @code{(@var{indicator}
3850 . @var{bitmaps})}, where @var{indicator} specifies a logical indicator
3851 type and @var{bitmaps} specifies the fringe bitmaps to use for that
3852 indicator.
3853
3854 Each @var{indicator} should be one of the following symbols:
3855
3856 @table @asis
3857 @item @code{truncation}, @code{continuation}.
3858 Used for truncation and continuation lines.
3859
3860 @item @code{up}, @code{down}, @code{top}, @code{bottom}, @code{top-bottom}
3861 Used when @code{indicate-buffer-boundaries} is non-@code{nil}:
3862 @code{up} and @code{down} indicate a buffer boundary lying above or
3863 below the window edge; @code{top} and @code{bottom} indicate the
3864 topmost and bottommost buffer text line; and @code{top-bottom}
3865 indicates where there is just one line of text in the buffer.
3866
3867 @item @code{empty-line}
3868 Used to indicate empty lines when @code{indicate-empty-lines} is
3869 non-@code{nil}.
3870
3871 @item @code{overlay-arrow}
3872 Used for overlay arrows (@pxref{Overlay Arrow}).
3873 @c Is this used anywhere?
3874 @c @item Unknown bitmap indicator:
3875 @c @code{unknown}.
3876 @end table
3877
3878 Each @var{bitmaps} value may be a list of symbols @code{(@var{left}
3879 @var{right} [@var{left1} @var{right1}])}. The @var{left} and
3880 @var{right} symbols specify the bitmaps shown in the left and/or right
3881 fringe, for the specific indicator. @var{left1} and @var{right1} are
3882 specific to the @code{bottom} and @code{top-bottom} indicators, and
3883 are used to indicate that the last text line has no final newline.
3884 Alternatively, @var{bitmaps} may be a single symbol which is used in
3885 both left and right fringes.
3886
3887 @xref{Fringe Bitmaps}, for a list of standard bitmap symbols and how
3888 to define your own. In addition, @code{nil} represents the empty
3889 bitmap (i.e., an indicator that is not shown).
3890
3891 When @code{fringe-indicator-alist} has a buffer-local value, and
3892 there is no bitmap defined for a logical indicator, or the bitmap is
3893 @code{t}, the corresponding value from the default value of
3894 @code{fringe-indicator-alist} is used.
3895 @end defvar
3896
3897 @node Fringe Cursors
3898 @subsection Fringe Cursors
3899 @cindex fringe cursors
3900 @cindex cursor, fringe
3901
3902 When a line is exactly as wide as the window, Emacs displays the
3903 cursor in the right fringe instead of using two lines. Different
3904 bitmaps are used to represent the cursor in the fringe depending on
3905 the current buffer's cursor type.
3906
3907 @defopt overflow-newline-into-fringe
3908 If this is non-@code{nil}, lines exactly as wide as the window (not
3909 counting the final newline character) are not continued. Instead,
3910 when point is at the end of the line, the cursor appears in the right
3911 fringe.
3912 @end defopt
3913
3914 @defvar fringe-cursor-alist
3915 This variable specifies the mapping from logical cursor type to the
3916 actual fringe bitmaps displayed in the right fringe. The value is an
3917 alist where each element has the form @code{(@var{cursor-type}
3918 . @var{bitmap})}, which means to use the fringe bitmap @var{bitmap} to
3919 display cursors of type @var{cursor-type}.
3920
3921 Each @var{cursor-type} should be one of @code{box}, @code{hollow},
3922 @code{bar}, @code{hbar}, or @code{hollow-small}. The first four have
3923 the same meanings as in the @code{cursor-type} frame parameter
3924 (@pxref{Cursor Parameters}). The @code{hollow-small} type is used
3925 instead of @code{hollow} when the normal @code{hollow-rectangle}
3926 bitmap is too tall to fit on a specific display line.
3927
3928 Each @var{bitmap} should be a symbol specifying the fringe bitmap to
3929 be displayed for that logical cursor type.
3930 @iftex
3931 See the next subsection for details.
3932 @end iftex
3933 @ifnottex
3934 @xref{Fringe Bitmaps}.
3935 @end ifnottex
3936
3937 @c FIXME: I can't find the fringes-indicator-alist variable. Maybe
3938 @c it should be fringe-indicator-alist or fringe-cursor-alist? --xfq
3939 When @code{fringe-cursor-alist} has a buffer-local value, and there is
3940 no bitmap defined for a cursor type, the corresponding value from the
3941 default value of @code{fringes-indicator-alist} is used.
3942 @end defvar
3943
3944 @node Fringe Bitmaps
3945 @subsection Fringe Bitmaps
3946 @cindex fringe bitmaps
3947 @cindex bitmaps, fringe
3948
3949 The @dfn{fringe bitmaps} are the actual bitmaps which represent the
3950 logical fringe indicators for truncated or continued lines, buffer
3951 boundaries, overlay arrows, etc. Each bitmap is represented by a
3952 symbol.
3953 @iftex
3954 These symbols are referred to by the variables
3955 @code{fringe-indicator-alist} and @code{fringe-cursor-alist},
3956 described in the previous subsections.
3957 @end iftex
3958 @ifnottex
3959 These symbols are referred to by the variable
3960 @code{fringe-indicator-alist}, which maps fringe indicators to bitmaps
3961 (@pxref{Fringe Indicators}), and the variable
3962 @code{fringe-cursor-alist}, which maps fringe cursors to bitmaps
3963 (@pxref{Fringe Cursors}).
3964 @end ifnottex
3965
3966 Lisp programs can also directly display a bitmap in the left or
3967 right fringe, by using a @code{display} property for one of the
3968 characters appearing in the line (@pxref{Other Display Specs}). Such
3969 a display specification has the form
3970
3971 @example
3972 (@var{fringe} @var{bitmap} [@var{face}])
3973 @end example
3974
3975 @noindent
3976 @var{fringe} is either the symbol @code{left-fringe} or
3977 @code{right-fringe}. @var{bitmap} is a symbol identifying the bitmap
3978 to display. The optional @var{face} names a face whose foreground
3979 color is used to display the bitmap; this face is automatically merged
3980 with the @code{fringe} face.
3981
3982 Here is a list of the standard fringe bitmaps defined in Emacs, and
3983 how they are currently used in Emacs (via
3984 @code{fringe-indicator-alist} and @code{fringe-cursor-alist}):
3985
3986 @table @asis
3987 @item @code{left-arrow}, @code{right-arrow}
3988 Used to indicate truncated lines.
3989
3990 @item @code{left-curly-arrow}, @code{right-curly-arrow}
3991 Used to indicate continued lines.
3992
3993 @item @code{right-triangle}, @code{left-triangle}
3994 The former is used by overlay arrows. The latter is unused.
3995
3996 @item @code{up-arrow}, @code{down-arrow}, @code{top-left-angle} @code{top-right-angle}
3997 @itemx @code{bottom-left-angle}, @code{bottom-right-angle}
3998 @itemx @code{top-right-angle}, @code{top-left-angle}
3999 @itemx @code{left-bracket}, @code{right-bracket}, @code{top-right-angle}, @code{top-left-angle}
4000 Used to indicate buffer boundaries.
4001
4002 @item @code{filled-rectangle}, @code{hollow-rectangle}
4003 @itemx @code{filled-square}, @code{hollow-square}
4004 @itemx @code{vertical-bar}, @code{horizontal-bar}
4005 Used for different types of fringe cursors.
4006
4007 @item @code{empty-line}, @code{exclamation-mark}, @code{question-mark}, @code{exclamation-mark}
4008 Not used by core Emacs features.
4009 @end table
4010
4011 @noindent
4012 The next subsection describes how to define your own fringe bitmaps.
4013
4014 @defun fringe-bitmaps-at-pos &optional pos window
4015 This function returns the fringe bitmaps of the display line
4016 containing position @var{pos} in window @var{window}. The return
4017 value has the form @code{(@var{left} @var{right} @var{ov})}, where @var{left}
4018 is the symbol for the fringe bitmap in the left fringe (or @code{nil}
4019 if no bitmap), @var{right} is similar for the right fringe, and @var{ov}
4020 is non-@code{nil} if there is an overlay arrow in the left fringe.
4021
4022 The value is @code{nil} if @var{pos} is not visible in @var{window}.
4023 If @var{window} is @code{nil}, that stands for the selected window.
4024 If @var{pos} is @code{nil}, that stands for the value of point in
4025 @var{window}.
4026 @end defun
4027
4028 @node Customizing Bitmaps
4029 @subsection Customizing Fringe Bitmaps
4030 @cindex fringe bitmaps, customizing
4031
4032 @defun define-fringe-bitmap bitmap bits &optional height width align
4033 This function defines the symbol @var{bitmap} as a new fringe bitmap,
4034 or replaces an existing bitmap with that name.
4035
4036 The argument @var{bits} specifies the image to use. It should be
4037 either a string or a vector of integers, where each element (an
4038 integer) corresponds to one row of the bitmap. Each bit of an integer
4039 corresponds to one pixel of the bitmap, where the low bit corresponds
4040 to the rightmost pixel of the bitmap.
4041
4042 The height is normally the length of @var{bits}. However, you
4043 can specify a different height with non-@code{nil} @var{height}. The width
4044 is normally 8, but you can specify a different width with non-@code{nil}
4045 @var{width}. The width must be an integer between 1 and 16.
4046
4047 The argument @var{align} specifies the positioning of the bitmap
4048 relative to the range of rows where it is used; the default is to
4049 center the bitmap. The allowed values are @code{top}, @code{center},
4050 or @code{bottom}.
4051
4052 The @var{align} argument may also be a list @code{(@var{align}
4053 @var{periodic})} where @var{align} is interpreted as described above.
4054 If @var{periodic} is non-@code{nil}, it specifies that the rows in
4055 @code{bits} should be repeated enough times to reach the specified
4056 height.
4057 @end defun
4058
4059 @defun destroy-fringe-bitmap bitmap
4060 This function destroy the fringe bitmap identified by @var{bitmap}.
4061 If @var{bitmap} identifies a standard fringe bitmap, it actually
4062 restores the standard definition of that bitmap, instead of
4063 eliminating it entirely.
4064 @end defun
4065
4066 @defun set-fringe-bitmap-face bitmap &optional face
4067 This sets the face for the fringe bitmap @var{bitmap} to @var{face}.
4068 If @var{face} is @code{nil}, it selects the @code{fringe} face. The
4069 bitmap's face controls the color to draw it in.
4070
4071 @var{face} is merged with the @code{fringe} face, so normally
4072 @var{face} should specify only the foreground color.
4073 @end defun
4074
4075 @node Overlay Arrow
4076 @subsection The Overlay Arrow
4077 @c @cindex overlay arrow Duplicates variable names
4078
4079 The @dfn{overlay arrow} is useful for directing the user's attention
4080 to a particular line in a buffer. For example, in the modes used for
4081 interface to debuggers, the overlay arrow indicates the line of code
4082 about to be executed. This feature has nothing to do with
4083 @dfn{overlays} (@pxref{Overlays}).
4084
4085 @defvar overlay-arrow-string
4086 This variable holds the string to display to call attention to a
4087 particular line, or @code{nil} if the arrow feature is not in use.
4088 On a graphical display the contents of the string are ignored; instead a
4089 glyph is displayed in the fringe area to the left of the display area.
4090 @end defvar
4091
4092 @defvar overlay-arrow-position
4093 This variable holds a marker that indicates where to display the overlay
4094 arrow. It should point at the beginning of a line. On a non-graphical
4095 display the arrow text
4096 appears at the beginning of that line, overlaying any text that would
4097 otherwise appear. Since the arrow is usually short, and the line
4098 usually begins with indentation, normally nothing significant is
4099 overwritten.
4100
4101 The overlay-arrow string is displayed in any given buffer if the value
4102 of @code{overlay-arrow-position} in that buffer points into that
4103 buffer. Thus, it is possible to display multiple overlay arrow strings
4104 by creating buffer-local bindings of @code{overlay-arrow-position}.
4105 However, it is usually cleaner to use
4106 @code{overlay-arrow-variable-list} to achieve this result.
4107 @c !!! overlay-arrow-position: but the overlay string may remain in the display
4108 @c of some other buffer until an update is required. This should be fixed
4109 @c now. Is it?
4110 @end defvar
4111
4112 You can do a similar job by creating an overlay with a
4113 @code{before-string} property. @xref{Overlay Properties}.
4114
4115 You can define multiple overlay arrows via the variable
4116 @code{overlay-arrow-variable-list}.
4117
4118 @defvar overlay-arrow-variable-list
4119 This variable's value is a list of variables, each of which specifies
4120 the position of an overlay arrow. The variable
4121 @code{overlay-arrow-position} has its normal meaning because it is on
4122 this list.
4123 @end defvar
4124
4125 Each variable on this list can have properties
4126 @code{overlay-arrow-string} and @code{overlay-arrow-bitmap} that
4127 specify an overlay arrow string (for text terminals) or fringe bitmap
4128 (for graphical terminals) to display at the corresponding overlay
4129 arrow position. If either property is not set, the default
4130 @code{overlay-arrow-string} or @code{overlay-arrow} fringe indicator
4131 is used.
4132
4133
4134 @node Scroll Bars
4135 @section Scroll Bars
4136 @cindex scroll bars
4137
4138 Normally the frame parameter @code{vertical-scroll-bars} controls
4139 whether the windows in the frame have vertical scroll bars, and whether
4140 they are on the left or right. The frame parameter
4141 @code{scroll-bar-width} specifies how wide they are (@code{nil} meaning
4142 the default).
4143
4144 The frame parameter @code{horizontal-scroll-bars} controls whether
4145 the windows in the frame have horizontal scroll bars. The frame
4146 parameter @code{scroll-bar-height} specifies how high they are
4147 (@code{nil} meaning the default). @xref{Layout Parameters}.
4148
4149 @vindex horizontal-scroll-bars-available-p
4150 Horizontal scroll bars are not available on all platforms. The
4151 function @code{horizontal-scroll-bars-available-p} which takes no
4152 argument returns non-@code{nil} if they are available on your system.
4153
4154 The following three functions take as argument a live frame which
4155 defaults to the selected one.
4156
4157 @defun frame-current-scroll-bars &optional frame
4158 This function reports the scroll bar types for frame @var{frame}. The
4159 value is a cons cell @code{(@var{vertical-type} .@:
4160 @var{horizontal-type})}, where @var{vertical-type} is either
4161 @code{left}, @code{right}, or @code{nil} (which means no vertical scroll
4162 bar.) @var{horizontal-type} is either @code{bottom} or @code{nil}
4163 (which means no horizontal scroll bar).
4164 @end defun
4165
4166 @defun frame-scroll-bar-width &optional Lisp_Object &optional frame
4167 This function returns the width of vertical scroll bars of @var{frame}
4168 in pixels.
4169 @end defun
4170
4171 @defun frame-scroll-bar-height &optional Lisp_Object &optional frame
4172 This function returns the height of horizontal scroll bars of
4173 @var{frame} in pixels.
4174 @end defun
4175
4176 You can override the frame specific settings for individual windows by
4177 using the following function:
4178
4179 @defun set-window-scroll-bars window &optional width vertical-type height horizontal-type
4180 This function sets the width and/or height and the types of scroll bars
4181 for window @var{window}.
4182
4183 @var{width} specifies the width of the vertical scroll bar in pixels
4184 (@code{nil} means use the width specified for the frame).
4185 @var{vertical-type} specifies whether to have a vertical scroll bar and,
4186 if so, where. The possible values are @code{left}, @code{right},
4187 @code{t}, which means to use the frame's default, and @code{nil} for no
4188 vertical scroll bar.
4189
4190 @var{height} specifies the height of the horizontal scroll bar in pixels
4191 (@code{nil} means use the height specified for the frame).
4192 @var{horizontal-type} specifies whether to have a horizontal scroll bar.
4193 The possible values are @code{bottom}, @code{t}, which means to use the
4194 frame's default, and @code{nil} for no horizontal scroll bar.
4195
4196 If @var{window} is @code{nil}, the selected window is used.
4197 @end defun
4198
4199 The following four functions take as argument a live window which
4200 defaults to the selected one.
4201
4202 @defun window-scroll-bars &optional window
4203 This function returns a list of the form @code{(@var{width}
4204 @var{columns} @var{vertical-type} @var{height} @var{lines}
4205 @var{horizontal-type})}.
4206
4207 The value @var{width} is the value that was specified for the width of
4208 the vertical scroll bar (which may be @code{nil}); @var{columns} is the
4209 (possibly rounded) number of columns that the vertical scroll bar
4210 actually occupies.
4211
4212 The value @var{height} is the value that was specified for the height of
4213 the horizontal scroll bar (which may be @code{nil}); @var{lines} is the
4214 (possibly rounded) number of lines that the horizontally scroll bar
4215 actually occupies.
4216 @end defun
4217
4218 @defun window-current-scroll-bars &optional window
4219 This function reports the scroll bar type for window @var{window}. The
4220 value is a cons cell @code{(@var{vertical-type} .@:
4221 @var{horizontal-type})}. Unlike @code{window-scroll-bars}, this reports
4222 the scroll bar type actually used, once frame defaults and
4223 @code{scroll-bar-mode} are taken into account.
4224 @end defun
4225
4226 @defun window-scroll-bar-width &optional window
4227 This function returns the width in pixels of @var{window}'s vertical
4228 scrollbar.
4229 @end defun
4230
4231 @defun window-scroll-bar-height &optional window
4232 This function returns the height in pixels of @var{window}'s horizontal
4233 scrollbar.
4234 @end defun
4235
4236 If you don't specify these values for a window with
4237 @code{set-window-scroll-bars}, the buffer-local variables
4238 @code{vertical-scroll-bar}, @code{horizontal-scroll-bar},
4239 @code{scroll-bar-width} and @code{scroll-bar-height} in the buffer being
4240 displayed control the window's scroll bars. The function
4241 @code{set-window-buffer} examines these variables. If you change them
4242 in a buffer that is already visible in a window, you can make the window
4243 take note of the new values by calling @code{set-window-buffer}
4244 specifying the same buffer that is already displayed.
4245
4246 You can control the appearance of scroll bars for a particular buffer by
4247 setting the following variables which automatically become buffer-local
4248 when set.
4249
4250 @defvar vertical-scroll-bar
4251 This variable specifies the location of the vertical scroll bar. The
4252 possible values are @code{left}, @code{right}, @code{t}, which means to
4253 use the frame's default, and @code{nil} for no scroll bar.
4254 @end defvar
4255
4256 @defvar horizontal-scroll-bar
4257 This variable specifies the location of the horizontal scroll bar. The
4258 possible values are @code{bottom}, @code{t}, which means to use the
4259 frame's default, and @code{nil} for no scroll bar.
4260 @end defvar
4261
4262 @defvar scroll-bar-width
4263 This variable specifies the width of the buffer's vertical scroll bars,
4264 measured in pixels. A value of @code{nil} means to use the value
4265 specified by the frame.
4266 @end defvar
4267
4268 @defvar scroll-bar-height
4269 This variable specifies the height of the buffer's horizontal scroll
4270 bar, measured in pixels. A value of @code{nil} means to use the value
4271 specified by the frame.
4272 @end defvar
4273
4274 Finally you can toggle the display of scroll bars on all frames by
4275 customizing the variables @code{scroll-bar-mode} and
4276 @code{horizontal-scroll-bar-mode}.
4277
4278 @defopt scroll-bar-mode
4279 This variable controls whether and where to put vertical scroll bars in
4280 all frames. The possible values are @code{nil} for no scroll bars,
4281 @code{left} to put scroll bars on the left and @code{right} to put
4282 scroll bars on the right.
4283 @end defopt
4284
4285 @defopt horizontal-scroll-bar-mode
4286 This variable controls whether to display horizontal scroll bars on all
4287 frames.
4288 @end defopt
4289
4290
4291 @node Window Dividers
4292 @section Window Dividers
4293 @cindex window dividers
4294 @cindex right dividers
4295 @cindex bottom dividers
4296
4297 Window dividers are bars drawn between a frame's windows. A right
4298 divider is drawn between a window and any adjacent windows on the right.
4299 Its width (thickness) is specified by the frame parameter
4300 @code{right-divider-width}. A bottom divider is drawn between a
4301 window and adjacent windows on the bottom or the echo area. Its width
4302 is specified by the frame parameter @code{bottom-divider-width}. In
4303 either case, specifying a width of zero means to not draw such dividers.
4304 @xref{Layout Parameters}.
4305
4306 Technically, a right divider belongs to the window on its left,
4307 which means that its width contributes to the total width of that
4308 window. A bottom divider belongs to the window above it, which
4309 means that its width contributes to the total height of that window.
4310 @xref{Window Sizes}. When a window has both, a right and a bottom
4311 divider, the bottom divider prevails. This means that a bottom
4312 divider is drawn over the full total width of its window while the right
4313 divider ends above the bottom divider.
4314
4315 Dividers can be dragged with the mouse and are therefore useful for
4316 adjusting the sizes of adjacent windows with the mouse. They also serve
4317 to visually set apart adjacent windows when no scroll bars or mode lines
4318 are present. The following three faces allow the customization of the
4319 appearance of dividers:
4320
4321 @table @code
4322 @item window-divider
4323 When a divider is less than three pixels wide, it is drawn solidly with
4324 the foreground of this face. For larger dividers this face is used for
4325 the inner part only, excluding the first and last pixel.
4326
4327 @item window-divider-first-pixel
4328 This is the face used for drawing the first pixel of a divider that is
4329 at least three pixels wide. To obtain a solid appearance, set this to
4330 the same value used for the @code{window-divider} face.
4331
4332 @item window-divider-last-pixel
4333 This is the face used for drawing the last pixel of a divider that is at
4334 least three pixels wide. To obtain a solid appearance, set this to the
4335 same value used for the @code{window-divider} face.
4336 @end table
4337
4338 You can get the sizes of the dividers of a specific window with the
4339 following two functions.
4340
4341 @defun window-right-divider-width &optional window
4342 Return the width (thickness) in pixels of @var{window}'s right divider.
4343 @var{window} must be a live window and defaults to the selected one.
4344 The return value is always zero for a rightmost window.
4345 @end defun
4346
4347 @defun window-bottom-divider-width &optional window
4348 Return the width (thickness) in pixels of @var{window}'s bottom divider.
4349 @var{window} must be a live window and defaults to the selected one.
4350 The return value is zero for the minibuffer window or a bottommost
4351 window on a minibuffer-less frame.
4352 @end defun
4353
4354
4355 @node Display Property
4356 @section The @code{display} Property
4357 @cindex display specification
4358 @kindex display @r{(text property)}
4359
4360 The @code{display} text property (or overlay property) is used to
4361 insert images into text, and to control other aspects of how text
4362 displays. The value of the @code{display} property should be a
4363 display specification, or a list or vector containing several display
4364 specifications. Display specifications in the same @code{display}
4365 property value generally apply in parallel to the text they cover.
4366
4367 If several sources (overlays and/or a text property) specify values
4368 for the @code{display} property, only one of the values takes effect,
4369 following the rules of @code{get-char-property}. @xref{Examining
4370 Properties}.
4371
4372 The rest of this section describes several kinds of
4373 display specifications and what they mean.
4374
4375 @menu
4376 * Replacing Specs:: Display specs that replace the text.
4377 * Specified Space:: Displaying one space with a specified width.
4378 * Pixel Specification:: Specifying space width or height in pixels.
4379 * Other Display Specs:: Displaying an image; adjusting the height,
4380 spacing, and other properties of text.
4381 * Display Margins:: Displaying text or images to the side of the main text.
4382 @end menu
4383
4384 @node Replacing Specs
4385 @subsection Display Specs That Replace The Text
4386 @cindex replacing display specs
4387
4388 Some kinds of display specifications specify something to display
4389 instead of the text that has the property. These are called
4390 @dfn{replacing} display specifications. Emacs does not allow the user
4391 to interactively move point into the middle of buffer text that is
4392 replaced in this way.
4393
4394 If a list of display specifications includes more than one replacing
4395 display specification, the first overrides the rest. Replacing
4396 display specifications make most other display specifications
4397 irrelevant, since those don't apply to the replacement.
4398
4399 For replacing display specifications, @dfn{the text that has the
4400 property} means all the consecutive characters that have the same
4401 Lisp object as their @code{display} property; these characters are
4402 replaced as a single unit. If two characters have different Lisp
4403 objects as their @code{display} properties (i.e., objects which are
4404 not @code{eq}), they are handled separately.
4405
4406 Here is an example which illustrates this point. A string serves as
4407 a replacing display specification, which replaces the text that has
4408 the property with the specified string (@pxref{Other Display Specs}).
4409 Consider the following function:
4410
4411 @smallexample
4412 (defun foo ()
4413 (dotimes (i 5)
4414 (let ((string (concat "A"))
4415 (start (+ i i (point-min))))
4416 (put-text-property start (1+ start) 'display string)
4417 (put-text-property start (+ 2 start) 'display string))))
4418 @end smallexample
4419
4420 @noindent
4421 This function gives each of the first ten characters in the buffer a
4422 @code{display} property which is a string @code{"A"}, but they don't
4423 all get the same string object. The first two characters get the same
4424 string object, so they are replaced with one @samp{A}; the fact that
4425 the display property was assigned in two separate calls to
4426 @code{put-text-property} is irrelevant. Similarly, the next two
4427 characters get a second string (@code{concat} creates a new string
4428 object), so they are replaced with one @samp{A}; and so on. Thus, the
4429 ten characters appear as five A's.
4430
4431 @node Specified Space
4432 @subsection Specified Spaces
4433 @cindex spaces, specified height or width
4434 @cindex variable-width spaces
4435
4436 To display a space of specified width and/or height, use a display
4437 specification of the form @code{(space . @var{props})}, where
4438 @var{props} is a property list (a list of alternating properties and
4439 values). You can put this property on one or more consecutive
4440 characters; a space of the specified height and width is displayed in
4441 place of @emph{all} of those characters. These are the properties you
4442 can use in @var{props} to specify the weight of the space:
4443
4444 @table @code
4445 @item :width @var{width}
4446 If @var{width} is a number, it specifies
4447 that the space width should be @var{width} times the normal character
4448 width. @var{width} can also be a @dfn{pixel width} specification
4449 (@pxref{Pixel Specification}).
4450
4451 @item :relative-width @var{factor}
4452 Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
4453 first character in the group of consecutive characters that have the
4454 same @code{display} property. The space width is the pixel width of
4455 that character, multiplied by @var{factor}. (On text-mode terminals,
4456 the ``pixel width'' of a character is usually 1, but it could be more
4457 for TABs and double-width CJK characters.)
4458
4459 @item :align-to @var{hpos}
4460 Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach @var{hpos}.
4461 If @var{hpos} is a number, it is measured in units of the normal
4462 character width. @var{hpos} can also be a @dfn{pixel width}
4463 specification (@pxref{Pixel Specification}).
4464 @end table
4465
4466 You should use one and only one of the above properties. You can
4467 also specify the height of the space, with these properties:
4468
4469 @table @code
4470 @item :height @var{height}
4471 Specifies the height of the space.
4472 If @var{height} is a number, it specifies
4473 that the space height should be @var{height} times the normal character
4474 height. The @var{height} may also be a @dfn{pixel height} specification
4475 (@pxref{Pixel Specification}).
4476
4477 @item :relative-height @var{factor}
4478 Specifies the height of the space, multiplying the ordinary height
4479 of the text having this display specification by @var{factor}.
4480
4481 @item :ascent @var{ascent}
4482 If the value of @var{ascent} is a non-negative number no greater than
4483 100, it specifies that @var{ascent} percent of the height of the space
4484 should be considered as the ascent of the space---that is, the part
4485 above the baseline. The ascent may also be specified in pixel units
4486 with a @dfn{pixel ascent} specification (@pxref{Pixel Specification}).
4487
4488 @end table
4489
4490 Don't use both @code{:height} and @code{:relative-height} together.
4491
4492 The @code{:width} and @code{:align-to} properties are supported on
4493 non-graphic terminals, but the other space properties in this section
4494 are not.
4495
4496 Note that space properties are treated as paragraph separators for
4497 the purposes of reordering bidirectional text for display.
4498 @xref{Bidirectional Display}, for the details.
4499
4500 @node Pixel Specification
4501 @subsection Pixel Specification for Spaces
4502 @cindex spaces, pixel specification
4503
4504 The value of the @code{:width}, @code{:align-to}, @code{:height},
4505 and @code{:ascent} properties can be a special kind of expression that
4506 is evaluated during redisplay. The result of the evaluation is used
4507 as an absolute number of pixels.
4508
4509 The following expressions are supported:
4510
4511 @smallexample
4512 @group
4513 @var{expr} ::= @var{num} | (@var{num}) | @var{unit} | @var{elem} | @var{pos} | @var{image} | @var{form}
4514 @var{num} ::= @var{integer} | @var{float} | @var{symbol}
4515 @var{unit} ::= in | mm | cm | width | height
4516 @end group
4517 @group
4518 @var{elem} ::= left-fringe | right-fringe | left-margin | right-margin
4519 | scroll-bar | text
4520 @var{pos} ::= left | center | right
4521 @var{form} ::= (@var{num} . @var{expr}) | (@var{op} @var{expr} ...)
4522 @var{op} ::= + | -
4523 @end group
4524 @end smallexample
4525
4526 The form @var{num} specifies a fraction of the default frame font
4527 height or width. The form @code{(@var{num})} specifies an absolute
4528 number of pixels. If @var{num} is a symbol, @var{symbol}, its
4529 buffer-local variable binding is used.
4530
4531 The @code{in}, @code{mm}, and @code{cm} units specify the number of
4532 pixels per inch, millimeter, and centimeter, respectively. The
4533 @code{width} and @code{height} units correspond to the default width
4534 and height of the current face. An image specification @code{image}
4535 corresponds to the width or height of the image.
4536
4537 The elements @code{left-fringe}, @code{right-fringe},
4538 @code{left-margin}, @code{right-margin}, @code{scroll-bar}, and
4539 @code{text} specify to the width of the corresponding area of the
4540 window.
4541
4542 The @code{left}, @code{center}, and @code{right} positions can be
4543 used with @code{:align-to} to specify a position relative to the left
4544 edge, center, or right edge of the text area.
4545
4546 Any of the above window elements (except @code{text}) can also be
4547 used with @code{:align-to} to specify that the position is relative to
4548 the left edge of the given area. Once the base offset for a relative
4549 position has been set (by the first occurrence of one of these
4550 symbols), further occurrences of these symbols are interpreted as the
4551 width of the specified area. For example, to align to the center of
4552 the left-margin, use
4553
4554 @example
4555 :align-to (+ left-margin (0.5 . left-margin))
4556 @end example
4557
4558 If no specific base offset is set for alignment, it is always relative
4559 to the left edge of the text area. For example, @samp{:align-to 0} in a
4560 header-line aligns with the first text column in the text area.
4561
4562 A value of the form @code{(@var{num} . @var{expr})} stands for the
4563 product of the values of @var{num} and @var{expr}. For example,
4564 @code{(2 . in)} specifies a width of 2 inches, while @code{(0.5 .
4565 @var{image})} specifies half the width (or height) of the specified
4566 image.
4567
4568 The form @code{(+ @var{expr} ...)} adds up the value of the
4569 expressions. The form @code{(- @var{expr} ...)} negates or subtracts
4570 the value of the expressions.
4571
4572 @node Other Display Specs
4573 @subsection Other Display Specifications
4574
4575 Here are the other sorts of display specifications that you can use
4576 in the @code{display} text property.
4577
4578 @table @code
4579 @item @var{string}
4580 Display @var{string} instead of the text that has this property.
4581
4582 Recursive display specifications are not supported---@var{string}'s
4583 @code{display} properties, if any, are not used.
4584
4585 @item (image . @var{image-props})
4586 This kind of display specification is an image descriptor (@pxref{Images}).
4587 When used as a display specification, it means to display the image
4588 instead of the text that has the display specification.
4589
4590 @item (slice @var{x} @var{y} @var{width} @var{height})
4591 This specification together with @code{image} specifies a @dfn{slice}
4592 (a partial area) of the image to display. The elements @var{y} and
4593 @var{x} specify the top left corner of the slice, within the image;
4594 @var{width} and @var{height} specify the width and height of the
4595 slice. Integers are numbers of pixels. A floating-point number
4596 in the range 0.0--1.0 stands for that fraction of the width or height
4597 of the entire image.
4598
4599 @item ((margin nil) @var{string})
4600 A display specification of this form means to display @var{string}
4601 instead of the text that has the display specification, at the same
4602 position as that text. It is equivalent to using just @var{string},
4603 but it is done as a special case of marginal display (@pxref{Display
4604 Margins}).
4605
4606 @item (left-fringe @var{bitmap} @r{[}@var{face}@r{]})
4607 @itemx (right-fringe @var{bitmap} @r{[}@var{face}@r{]})
4608 This display specification on any character of a line of text causes
4609 the specified @var{bitmap} be displayed in the left or right fringes
4610 for that line, instead of the characters that have the display
4611 specification. The optional @var{face} specifies the colors to be
4612 used for the bitmap. @xref{Fringe Bitmaps}, for the details.
4613
4614 @item (space-width @var{factor})
4615 This display specification affects all the space characters within the
4616 text that has the specification. It displays all of these spaces
4617 @var{factor} times as wide as normal. The element @var{factor} should
4618 be an integer or float. Characters other than spaces are not affected
4619 at all; in particular, this has no effect on tab characters.
4620
4621 @item (height @var{height})
4622 This display specification makes the text taller or shorter.
4623 Here are the possibilities for @var{height}:
4624
4625 @table @asis
4626 @item @code{(+ @var{n})}
4627 @c FIXME: Add an index for "step"? --xfq
4628 This means to use a font that is @var{n} steps larger. A @dfn{step} is
4629 defined by the set of available fonts---specifically, those that match
4630 what was otherwise specified for this text, in all attributes except
4631 height. Each size for which a suitable font is available counts as
4632 another step. @var{n} should be an integer.
4633
4634 @item @code{(- @var{n})}
4635 This means to use a font that is @var{n} steps smaller.
4636
4637 @item a number, @var{factor}
4638 A number, @var{factor}, means to use a font that is @var{factor} times
4639 as tall as the default font.
4640
4641 @item a symbol, @var{function}
4642 A symbol is a function to compute the height. It is called with the
4643 current height as argument, and should return the new height to use.
4644
4645 @item anything else, @var{form}
4646 If the @var{height} value doesn't fit the previous possibilities, it is
4647 a form. Emacs evaluates it to get the new height, with the symbol
4648 @code{height} bound to the current specified font height.
4649 @end table
4650
4651 @item (raise @var{factor})
4652 This kind of display specification raises or lowers the text
4653 it applies to, relative to the baseline of the line.
4654
4655 @var{factor} must be a number, which is interpreted as a multiple of the
4656 height of the affected text. If it is positive, that means to display
4657 the characters raised. If it is negative, that means to display them
4658 lower down.
4659
4660 If the text also has a @code{height} display specification, that does
4661 not affect the amount of raising or lowering, which is based on the
4662 faces used for the text.
4663 @end table
4664
4665 @c We put all the '@code{(when ...)}' on one line to encourage
4666 @c makeinfo's end-of-sentence heuristics to DTRT. Previously, the dot
4667 @c was at eol; the info file ended up w/ two spaces rendered after it.
4668 You can make any display specification conditional. To do that,
4669 package it in another list of the form
4670 @code{(when @var{condition} . @var{spec})}.
4671 Then the specification @var{spec} applies only when
4672 @var{condition} evaluates to a non-@code{nil} value. During the
4673 evaluation, @code{object} is bound to the string or buffer having the
4674 conditional @code{display} property. @code{position} and
4675 @code{buffer-position} are bound to the position within @code{object}
4676 and the buffer position where the @code{display} property was found,
4677 respectively. Both positions can be different when @code{object} is a
4678 string.
4679
4680 @node Display Margins
4681 @subsection Displaying in the Margins
4682 @cindex display margins
4683 @cindex margins, display
4684
4685 A buffer can have blank areas called @dfn{display margins} on the
4686 left and on the right. Ordinary text never appears in these areas,
4687 but you can put things into the display margins using the
4688 @code{display} property. There is currently no way to make text or
4689 images in the margin mouse-sensitive.
4690
4691 The way to display something in the margins is to specify it in a
4692 margin display specification in the @code{display} property of some
4693 text. This is a replacing display specification, meaning that the
4694 text you put it on does not get displayed; the margin display appears,
4695 but that text does not.
4696
4697 A margin display specification looks like @code{((margin
4698 right-margin) @var{spec})} or @code{((margin left-margin) @var{spec})}.
4699 Here, @var{spec} is another display specification that says what to
4700 display in the margin. Typically it is a string of text to display,
4701 or an image descriptor.
4702
4703 To display something in the margin @emph{in association with}
4704 certain buffer text, without altering or preventing the display of
4705 that text, put a @code{before-string} property on the text and put the
4706 margin display specification on the contents of the before-string.
4707
4708 Before the display margins can display anything, you must give
4709 them a nonzero width. The usual way to do that is to set these
4710 variables:
4711
4712 @defvar left-margin-width
4713 This variable specifies the width of the left margin, in character
4714 cell (a.k.a.@: ``column'') units. It is buffer-local in all buffers.
4715 A value of @code{nil} means no left marginal area.
4716 @end defvar
4717
4718 @defvar right-margin-width
4719 This variable specifies the width of the right margin, in character
4720 cell units. It is buffer-local in all buffers. A value of @code{nil}
4721 means no right marginal area.
4722 @end defvar
4723
4724 Setting these variables does not immediately affect the window. These
4725 variables are checked when a new buffer is displayed in the window.
4726 Thus, you can make changes take effect by calling
4727 @code{set-window-buffer}.
4728
4729 You can also set the margin widths immediately.
4730
4731 @defun set-window-margins window left &optional right
4732 This function specifies the margin widths for window @var{window}, in
4733 character cell units. The argument @var{left} controls the left
4734 margin, and @var{right} controls the right margin (default @code{0}).
4735 @end defun
4736
4737 @defun window-margins &optional window
4738 This function returns the width of the left and right margins of
4739 @var{window} as a cons cell of the form @w{@code{(@var{left}
4740 . @var{right})}}. If one of the two marginal areas does not exist,
4741 its width is returned as @code{nil}; if neither of the two margins exist,
4742 the function returns @code{(nil)}. If @var{window} is @code{nil}, the
4743 selected window is used.
4744 @end defun
4745
4746 @node Images
4747 @section Images
4748 @cindex images in buffers
4749
4750 To display an image in an Emacs buffer, you must first create an image
4751 descriptor, then use it as a display specifier in the @code{display}
4752 property of text that is displayed (@pxref{Display Property}).
4753
4754 Emacs is usually able to display images when it is run on a
4755 graphical terminal. Images cannot be displayed in a text terminal, on
4756 certain graphical terminals that lack the support for this, or if
4757 Emacs is compiled without image support. You can use the function
4758 @code{display-images-p} to determine if images can in principle be
4759 displayed (@pxref{Display Feature Testing}).
4760
4761 @menu
4762 * Image Formats:: Supported image formats.
4763 * Image Descriptors:: How to specify an image for use in @code{:display}.
4764 * XBM Images:: Special features for XBM format.
4765 * XPM Images:: Special features for XPM format.
4766 * PostScript Images:: Special features for PostScript format.
4767 * ImageMagick Images:: Special features available through ImageMagick.
4768 * Other Image Types:: Various other formats are supported.
4769 * Defining Images:: Convenient ways to define an image for later use.
4770 * Showing Images:: Convenient ways to display an image once it is defined.
4771 * Multi-Frame Images:: Some images contain more than one frame.
4772 * Image Cache:: Internal mechanisms of image display.
4773 @end menu
4774
4775 @node Image Formats
4776 @subsection Image Formats
4777 @cindex image formats
4778 @cindex image types
4779
4780 Emacs can display a number of different image formats. Some of
4781 these image formats are supported only if particular support libraries
4782 are installed. On some platforms, Emacs can load support libraries on
4783 demand; if so, the variable @code{dynamic-library-alist} can be used
4784 to modify the set of known names for these dynamic libraries.
4785 @xref{Dynamic Libraries}.
4786
4787 Supported image formats (and the required support libraries) include
4788 PBM and XBM (which do not depend on support libraries and are always
4789 available), XPM (@code{libXpm}), GIF (@code{libgif} or
4790 @code{libungif}), PostScript (@code{gs}), JPEG (@code{libjpeg}), TIFF
4791 (@code{libtiff}), PNG (@code{libpng}), and SVG (@code{librsvg}).
4792
4793 Each of these image formats is associated with an @dfn{image type
4794 symbol}. The symbols for the above formats are, respectively,
4795 @code{pbm}, @code{xbm}, @code{xpm}, @code{gif}, @code{postscript},
4796 @code{jpeg}, @code{tiff}, @code{png}, and @code{svg}.
4797
4798 Furthermore, if you build Emacs with ImageMagick
4799 (@code{libMagickWand}) support, Emacs can display any image format
4800 that ImageMagick can. @xref{ImageMagick Images}. All images
4801 displayed via ImageMagick have type symbol @code{imagemagick}.
4802
4803 @defvar image-types
4804 This variable contains a list of type symbols for image formats which
4805 are potentially supported in the current configuration.
4806
4807 ``Potentially'' means that Emacs knows about the image types, not
4808 necessarily that they can be used (for example, they could depend on
4809 unavailable dynamic libraries). To know which image types are really
4810 available, use @code{image-type-available-p}.
4811 @end defvar
4812
4813 @defun image-type-available-p type
4814 This function returns non-@code{nil} if images of type @var{type} can
4815 be loaded and displayed. @var{type} must be an image type symbol.
4816
4817 For image types whose support libraries are statically linked, this
4818 function always returns @code{t}. For image types whose support
4819 libraries are dynamically loaded, it returns @code{t} if the library
4820 could be loaded and @code{nil} otherwise.
4821 @end defun
4822
4823 @node Image Descriptors
4824 @subsection Image Descriptors
4825 @cindex image descriptor
4826
4827 An @dfn{image descriptor} is a list which specifies the underlying
4828 data for an image, and how to display it. It is typically used as the
4829 value of a @code{display} overlay or text property (@pxref{Other
4830 Display Specs}); but @xref{Showing Images}, for convenient helper
4831 functions to insert images into buffers.
4832
4833 Each image descriptor has the form @code{(image . @var{props})},
4834 where @var{props} is a property list of alternating keyword symbols
4835 and values, including at least the pair @code{:type @var{type}} that
4836 specifies the image type.
4837
4838 The following is a list of properties that are meaningful for all
4839 image types (there are also properties which are meaningful only for
4840 certain image types, as documented in the following subsections):
4841
4842 @table @code
4843 @item :type @var{type}
4844 The image type.
4845 @ifnottex
4846 @xref{Image Formats}.
4847 @end ifnottex
4848 Every image descriptor must include this property.
4849
4850 @item :file @var{file}
4851 This says to load the image from file @var{file}. If @var{file} is
4852 not an absolute file name, it is expanded in @code{data-directory}.
4853
4854 @item :data @var{data}
4855 This specifies the raw image data. Each image descriptor must have
4856 either @code{:data} or @code{:file}, but not both.
4857
4858 For most image types, the value of a @code{:data} property should be a
4859 string containing the image data. Some image types do not support
4860 @code{:data}; for some others, @code{:data} alone is not enough, so
4861 you need to use other image properties along with @code{:data}. See
4862 the following subsections for details.
4863
4864 @item :margin @var{margin}
4865 This specifies how many pixels to add as an extra margin around the
4866 image. The value, @var{margin}, must be a non-negative number, or a
4867 pair @code{(@var{x} . @var{y})} of such numbers. If it is a pair,
4868 @var{x} specifies how many pixels to add horizontally, and @var{y}
4869 specifies how many pixels to add vertically. If @code{:margin} is not
4870 specified, the default is zero.
4871
4872 @item :ascent @var{ascent}
4873 This specifies the amount of the image's height to use for its
4874 ascent---that is, the part above the baseline. The value,
4875 @var{ascent}, must be a number in the range 0 to 100, or the symbol
4876 @code{center}.
4877
4878 If @var{ascent} is a number, that percentage of the image's height is
4879 used for its ascent.
4880
4881 If @var{ascent} is @code{center}, the image is vertically centered
4882 around a centerline which would be the vertical centerline of text drawn
4883 at the position of the image, in the manner specified by the text
4884 properties and overlays that apply to the image.
4885
4886 If this property is omitted, it defaults to 50.
4887
4888 @item :relief @var{relief}
4889 This adds a shadow rectangle around the image. The value,
4890 @var{relief}, specifies the width of the shadow lines, in pixels. If
4891 @var{relief} is negative, shadows are drawn so that the image appears
4892 as a pressed button; otherwise, it appears as an unpressed button.
4893
4894 @item :conversion @var{algorithm}
4895 This specifies a conversion algorithm that should be applied to the
4896 image before it is displayed; the value, @var{algorithm}, specifies
4897 which algorithm.
4898
4899 @table @code
4900 @item laplace
4901 @itemx emboss
4902 Specifies the Laplace edge detection algorithm, which blurs out small
4903 differences in color while highlighting larger differences. People
4904 sometimes consider this useful for displaying the image for a
4905 disabled button.
4906
4907 @item (edge-detection :matrix @var{matrix} :color-adjust @var{adjust})
4908 @cindex edge detection, images
4909 Specifies a general edge-detection algorithm. @var{matrix} must be
4910 either a nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel
4911 at position @math{x/y} in the transformed image is computed from
4912 original pixels around that position. @var{matrix} specifies, for each
4913 pixel in the neighborhood of @math{x/y}, a factor with which that pixel
4914 will influence the transformed pixel; element @math{0} specifies the
4915 factor for the pixel at @math{x-1/y-1}, element @math{1} the factor for
4916 the pixel at @math{x/y-1} etc., as shown below:
4917 @iftex
4918 @tex
4919 $$\pmatrix{x-1/y-1 & x/y-1 & x+1/y-1 \cr
4920 x-1/y & x/y & x+1/y \cr
4921 x-1/y+1& x/y+1 & x+1/y+1 \cr}$$
4922 @end tex
4923 @end iftex
4924 @ifnottex
4925 @display
4926 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1
4927 x-1/y x/y x+1/y
4928 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1)
4929 @end display
4930 @end ifnottex
4931
4932 The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color
4933 resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels,
4934 multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum
4935 of the factors' absolute values.
4936
4937 Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of
4938 @iftex
4939 @tex
4940 $$\pmatrix{1 & 0 & 0 \cr
4941 0& 0 & 0 \cr
4942 0 & 0 & -1 \cr}$$
4943 @end tex
4944 @end iftex
4945 @ifnottex
4946 @display
4947 (1 0 0
4948 0 0 0
4949 0 0 -1)
4950 @end display
4951 @end ifnottex
4952
4953 Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of
4954 @iftex
4955 @tex
4956 $$\pmatrix{ 2 & -1 & 0 \cr
4957 -1 & 0 & 1 \cr
4958 0 & 1 & -2 \cr}$$
4959 @end tex
4960 @end iftex
4961 @ifnottex
4962 @display
4963 ( 2 -1 0
4964 -1 0 1
4965 0 1 -2)
4966 @end display
4967 @end ifnottex
4968
4969 @item disabled
4970 Specifies transforming the image so that it looks disabled.
4971 @end table
4972
4973 @item :mask @var{mask}
4974 If @var{mask} is @code{heuristic} or @code{(heuristic @var{bg})}, build
4975 a clipping mask for the image, so that the background of a frame is
4976 visible behind the image. If @var{bg} is not specified, or if @var{bg}
4977 is @code{t}, determine the background color of the image by looking at
4978 the four corners of the image, assuming the most frequently occurring
4979 color from the corners is the background color of the image. Otherwise,
4980 @var{bg} must be a list @code{(@var{red} @var{green} @var{blue})}
4981 specifying the color to assume for the background of the image.
4982
4983 If @var{mask} is @code{nil}, remove a mask from the image, if it has
4984 one. Images in some formats include a mask which can be removed by
4985 specifying @code{:mask nil}.
4986
4987 @item :pointer @var{shape}
4988 This specifies the pointer shape when the mouse pointer is over this
4989 image. @xref{Pointer Shape}, for available pointer shapes.
4990
4991 @item :map @var{map}
4992 @cindex image maps
4993 This associates an image map of @dfn{hot spots} with this image.
4994
4995 An image map is an alist where each element has the format
4996 @code{(@var{area} @var{id} @var{plist})}. An @var{area} is specified
4997 as either a rectangle, a circle, or a polygon.
4998
4999 A rectangle is a cons
5000 @code{(rect . ((@var{x0} . @var{y0}) . (@var{x1} . @var{y1})))}
5001 which specifies the pixel coordinates of the upper left and bottom right
5002 corners of the rectangle area.
5003
5004 A circle is a cons
5005 @code{(circle . ((@var{x0} . @var{y0}) . @var{r}))}
5006 which specifies the center and the radius of the circle; @var{r} may
5007 be a float or integer.
5008
5009 A polygon is a cons
5010 @code{(poly . [@var{x0} @var{y0} @var{x1} @var{y1} ...])}
5011 where each pair in the vector describes one corner in the polygon.
5012
5013 When the mouse pointer lies on a hot-spot area of an image, the
5014 @var{plist} of that hot-spot is consulted; if it contains a @code{help-echo}
5015 property, that defines a tool-tip for the hot-spot, and if it contains
5016 a @code{pointer} property, that defines the shape of the mouse cursor when
5017 it is on the hot-spot.
5018 @xref{Pointer Shape}, for available pointer shapes.
5019
5020 When you click the mouse when the mouse pointer is over a hot-spot, an
5021 event is composed by combining the @var{id} of the hot-spot with the
5022 mouse event; for instance, @code{[area4 mouse-1]} if the hot-spot's
5023 @var{id} is @code{area4}.
5024 @end table
5025
5026 @defun image-mask-p spec &optional frame
5027 This function returns @code{t} if image @var{spec} has a mask bitmap.
5028 @var{frame} is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
5029 @var{frame} @code{nil} or omitted means to use the selected frame
5030 (@pxref{Input Focus}).
5031 @end defun
5032
5033 @node XBM Images
5034 @subsection XBM Images
5035 @cindex XBM
5036
5037 To use XBM format, specify @code{xbm} as the image type. This image
5038 format doesn't require an external library, so images of this type are
5039 always supported.
5040
5041 Additional image properties supported for the @code{xbm} image type are:
5042
5043 @table @code
5044 @item :foreground @var{foreground}
5045 The value, @var{foreground}, should be a string specifying the image
5046 foreground color, or @code{nil} for the default color. This color is
5047 used for each pixel in the XBM that is 1. The default is the frame's
5048 foreground color.
5049
5050 @item :background @var{background}
5051 The value, @var{background}, should be a string specifying the image
5052 background color, or @code{nil} for the default color. This color is
5053 used for each pixel in the XBM that is 0. The default is the frame's
5054 background color.
5055 @end table
5056
5057 If you specify an XBM image using data within Emacs instead of an
5058 external file, use the following three properties:
5059
5060 @table @code
5061 @item :data @var{data}
5062 The value, @var{data}, specifies the contents of the image.
5063 There are three formats you can use for @var{data}:
5064
5065 @itemize @bullet
5066 @item
5067 A vector of strings or bool-vectors, each specifying one line of the
5068 image. Do specify @code{:height} and @code{:width}.
5069
5070 @item
5071 A string containing the same byte sequence as an XBM file would contain.
5072 You must not specify @code{:height} and @code{:width} in this case,
5073 because omitting them is what indicates the data has the format of an
5074 XBM file. The file contents specify the height and width of the image.
5075
5076 @item
5077 A string or a bool-vector containing the bits of the image (plus perhaps
5078 some extra bits at the end that will not be used). It should contain at
5079 least @var{width} * @code{height} bits. In this case, you must specify
5080 @code{:height} and @code{:width}, both to indicate that the string
5081 contains just the bits rather than a whole XBM file, and to specify the
5082 size of the image.
5083 @end itemize
5084
5085 @item :width @var{width}
5086 The value, @var{width}, specifies the width of the image, in pixels.
5087
5088 @item :height @var{height}
5089 The value, @var{height}, specifies the height of the image, in pixels.
5090 @end table
5091
5092 @node XPM Images
5093 @subsection XPM Images
5094 @cindex XPM
5095
5096 To use XPM format, specify @code{xpm} as the image type. The
5097 additional image property @code{:color-symbols} is also meaningful with
5098 the @code{xpm} image type:
5099
5100 @table @code
5101 @item :color-symbols @var{symbols}
5102 The value, @var{symbols}, should be an alist whose elements have the
5103 form @code{(@var{name} . @var{color})}. In each element, @var{name} is
5104 the name of a color as it appears in the image file, and @var{color}
5105 specifies the actual color to use for displaying that name.
5106 @end table
5107
5108 @node PostScript Images
5109 @subsection PostScript Images
5110 @cindex postscript images
5111
5112 To use PostScript for an image, specify image type @code{postscript}.
5113 This works only if you have Ghostscript installed. You must always use
5114 these three properties:
5115
5116 @table @code
5117 @item :pt-width @var{width}
5118 The value, @var{width}, specifies the width of the image measured in
5119 points (1/72 inch). @var{width} must be an integer.
5120
5121 @item :pt-height @var{height}
5122 The value, @var{height}, specifies the height of the image in points
5123 (1/72 inch). @var{height} must be an integer.
5124
5125 @item :bounding-box @var{box}
5126 The value, @var{box}, must be a list or vector of four integers, which
5127 specifying the bounding box of the PostScript image, analogous to the
5128 @samp{BoundingBox} comment found in PostScript files.
5129
5130 @example
5131 %%BoundingBox: 22 171 567 738
5132 @end example
5133 @end table
5134
5135 @node ImageMagick Images
5136 @subsection ImageMagick Images
5137 @cindex ImageMagick images
5138 @cindex images, support for more formats
5139
5140 If you build Emacs with ImageMagick support, you can use the
5141 ImageMagick library to load many image formats (@pxref{File
5142 Conveniences,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}). The image type symbol
5143 for images loaded via ImageMagick is @code{imagemagick}, regardless of
5144 the actual underlying image format.
5145
5146 @defun imagemagick-types
5147 This function returns a list of image file extensions supported by the
5148 current ImageMagick installation. Each list element is a symbol
5149 representing an internal ImageMagick name for an image type, such as
5150 @code{BMP} for @file{.bmp} images.
5151 @end defun
5152
5153 @defopt imagemagick-enabled-types
5154 The value of this variable is a list of ImageMagick image types which
5155 Emacs may attempt to render using ImageMagick. Each list element
5156 should be one of the symbols in the list returned by
5157 @code{imagemagick-types}, or an equivalent string. Alternatively, a
5158 value of @code{t} enables ImageMagick for all possible image types.
5159 Regardless of the value of this variable,
5160 @code{imagemagick-types-inhibit} (see below) takes precedence.
5161 @end defopt
5162
5163 @defopt imagemagick-types-inhibit
5164 The value of this variable lists the ImageMagick image types which
5165 should never be rendered using ImageMagick, regardless of the value of
5166 @code{imagemagick-enabled-types}. A value of @code{t} disables
5167 ImageMagick entirely.
5168 @end defopt
5169
5170 @defvar image-format-suffixes
5171 This variable is an alist mapping image types to file name extensions.
5172 Emacs uses this in conjunction with the @code{:format} image property
5173 (see below) to give a hint to the ImageMagick library as to the type
5174 of an image. Each element has the form @code{(@var{type}
5175 @var{extension})}, where @var{type} is a symbol specifying an image
5176 content-type, and @var{extension} is a string that specifies the
5177 associated file name extension.
5178 @end defvar
5179
5180 Images loaded with ImageMagick support the following additional
5181 image descriptor properties:
5182
5183 @table @code
5184 @item :background @var{background}
5185 @var{background}, if non-@code{nil}, should be a string specifying a
5186 color, which is used as the image's background color if the image
5187 supports transparency. If the value is @code{nil}, it defaults to the
5188 frame's background color.
5189
5190 @item :width @var{width}, :height @var{height}
5191 The @code{:width} and @code{:height} keywords are used for scaling the
5192 image. If only one of them is specified, the other one will be
5193 calculated so as to preserve the aspect ratio. If both are specified,
5194 aspect ratio may not be preserved.
5195
5196 @item :max-width @var{max-width}, :max-height @var{max-height}
5197 The @code{:max-width} and @code{:max-height} keywords are used for
5198 scaling if the size of the image of the image exceeds these values.
5199 If @code{:width} is set it will have precedence over @code{max-width},
5200 and if @code{:height} is set it will have precedence over
5201 @code{max-height}, but you can otherwise mix these keywords as you
5202 wish. @code{:max-width} and @code{:max-height} will always preserve
5203 the aspect ratio.
5204
5205 @item :format @var{type}
5206 The value, @var{type}, should be a symbol specifying the type of the
5207 image data, as found in @code{image-format-suffixes}. This is used
5208 when the image does not have an associated file name, to provide a
5209 hint to ImageMagick to help it detect the image type.
5210
5211 @item :rotation @var{angle}
5212 Specifies a rotation angle in degrees.
5213
5214 @item :index @var{frame}
5215 @c Doesn't work: http://debbugs.gnu.org/7978
5216 @xref{Multi-Frame Images}.
5217 @end table
5218
5219 @node Other Image Types
5220 @subsection Other Image Types
5221 @cindex PBM
5222
5223 For PBM images, specify image type @code{pbm}. Color, gray-scale and
5224 monochromatic images are supported. For mono PBM images, two additional
5225 image properties are supported.
5226
5227 @table @code
5228 @item :foreground @var{foreground}
5229 The value, @var{foreground}, should be a string specifying the image
5230 foreground color, or @code{nil} for the default color. This color is
5231 used for each pixel in the PBM that is 1. The default is the frame's
5232 foreground color.
5233
5234 @item :background @var{background}
5235 The value, @var{background}, should be a string specifying the image
5236 background color, or @code{nil} for the default color. This color is
5237 used for each pixel in the PBM that is 0. The default is the frame's
5238 background color.
5239 @end table
5240
5241 @noindent
5242 The remaining image types that Emacs can support are:
5243
5244 @table @asis
5245 @item GIF
5246 Image type @code{gif}.
5247 Supports the @code{:index} property. @xref{Multi-Frame Images}.
5248
5249 @item JPEG
5250 Image type @code{jpeg}.
5251
5252 @item PNG
5253 Image type @code{png}.
5254
5255 @item SVG
5256 Image type @code{svg}.
5257
5258 @item TIFF
5259 Image type @code{tiff}.
5260 Supports the @code{:index} property. @xref{Multi-Frame Images}.
5261 @end table
5262
5263 @node Defining Images
5264 @subsection Defining Images
5265 @cindex define image
5266
5267 The functions @code{create-image}, @code{defimage} and
5268 @code{find-image} provide convenient ways to create image descriptors.
5269
5270 @defun create-image file-or-data &optional type data-p &rest props
5271 This function creates and returns an image descriptor which uses the
5272 data in @var{file-or-data}. @var{file-or-data} can be a file name or
5273 a string containing the image data; @var{data-p} should be @code{nil}
5274 for the former case, non-@code{nil} for the latter case.
5275
5276 The optional argument @var{type} is a symbol specifying the image type.
5277 If @var{type} is omitted or @code{nil}, @code{create-image} tries to
5278 determine the image type from the file's first few bytes, or else
5279 from the file's name.
5280
5281 The remaining arguments, @var{props}, specify additional image
5282 properties---for example,
5283
5284 @c ':heuristic-mask' is not documented?
5285 @example
5286 (create-image "foo.xpm" 'xpm nil :heuristic-mask t)
5287 @end example
5288
5289 The function returns @code{nil} if images of this type are not
5290 supported. Otherwise it returns an image descriptor.
5291 @end defun
5292
5293 @defmac defimage symbol specs &optional doc
5294 This macro defines @var{symbol} as an image name. The arguments
5295 @var{specs} is a list which specifies how to display the image.
5296 The third argument, @var{doc}, is an optional documentation string.
5297
5298 Each argument in @var{specs} has the form of a property list, and each
5299 one should specify at least the @code{:type} property and either the
5300 @code{:file} or the @code{:data} property. The value of @code{:type}
5301 should be a symbol specifying the image type, the value of
5302 @code{:file} is the file to load the image from, and the value of
5303 @code{:data} is a string containing the actual image data. Here is an
5304 example:
5305
5306 @example
5307 (defimage test-image
5308 ((:type xpm :file "~/test1.xpm")
5309 (:type xbm :file "~/test1.xbm")))
5310 @end example
5311
5312 @code{defimage} tests each argument, one by one, to see if it is
5313 usable---that is, if the type is supported and the file exists. The
5314 first usable argument is used to make an image descriptor which is
5315 stored in @var{symbol}.
5316
5317 If none of the alternatives will work, then @var{symbol} is defined
5318 as @code{nil}.
5319 @end defmac
5320
5321 @defun find-image specs
5322 This function provides a convenient way to find an image satisfying one
5323 of a list of image specifications @var{specs}.
5324
5325 Each specification in @var{specs} is a property list with contents
5326 depending on image type. All specifications must at least contain the
5327 properties @code{:type @var{type}} and either @w{@code{:file @var{file}}}
5328 or @w{@code{:data @var{data}}}, where @var{type} is a symbol specifying
5329 the image type, e.g., @code{xbm}, @var{file} is the file to load the
5330 image from, and @var{data} is a string containing the actual image data.
5331 The first specification in the list whose @var{type} is supported, and
5332 @var{file} exists, is used to construct the image specification to be
5333 returned. If no specification is satisfied, @code{nil} is returned.
5334
5335 The image is looked for in @code{image-load-path}.
5336 @end defun
5337
5338 @defopt image-load-path
5339 This variable's value is a list of locations in which to search for
5340 image files. If an element is a string or a variable symbol whose
5341 value is a string, the string is taken to be the name of a directory
5342 to search. If an element is a variable symbol whose value is a list,
5343 that is taken to be a list of directory names to search.
5344
5345 The default is to search in the @file{images} subdirectory of the
5346 directory specified by @code{data-directory}, then the directory
5347 specified by @code{data-directory}, and finally in the directories in
5348 @code{load-path}. Subdirectories are not automatically included in
5349 the search, so if you put an image file in a subdirectory, you have to
5350 supply the subdirectory name explicitly. For example, to find the
5351 image @file{images/foo/bar.xpm} within @code{data-directory}, you
5352 should specify the image as follows:
5353
5354 @example
5355 (defimage foo-image '((:type xpm :file "foo/bar.xpm")))
5356 @end example
5357 @end defopt
5358
5359 @defun image-load-path-for-library library image &optional path no-error
5360 This function returns a suitable search path for images used by the
5361 Lisp package @var{library}.
5362
5363 The function searches for @var{image} first using @code{image-load-path},
5364 excluding @file{@code{data-directory}/images}, and then in
5365 @code{load-path}, followed by a path suitable for @var{library}, which
5366 includes @file{../../etc/images} and @file{../etc/images} relative to
5367 the library file itself, and finally in
5368 @file{@code{data-directory}/images}.
5369
5370 Then this function returns a list of directories which contains first
5371 the directory in which @var{image} was found, followed by the value of
5372 @code{load-path}. If @var{path} is given, it is used instead of
5373 @code{load-path}.
5374
5375 If @var{no-error} is non-@code{nil} and a suitable path can't be
5376 found, don't signal an error. Instead, return a list of directories as
5377 before, except that @code{nil} appears in place of the image directory.
5378
5379 Here is an example of using @code{image-load-path-for-library}:
5380
5381 @example
5382 (defvar image-load-path) ; shush compiler
5383 (let* ((load-path (image-load-path-for-library
5384 "mh-e" "mh-logo.xpm"))
5385 (image-load-path (cons (car load-path)
5386 image-load-path)))
5387 (mh-tool-bar-folder-buttons-init))
5388 @end example
5389 @end defun
5390
5391 @node Showing Images
5392 @subsection Showing Images
5393 @cindex show image
5394
5395 You can use an image descriptor by setting up the @code{display}
5396 property yourself, but it is easier to use the functions in this
5397 section.
5398
5399 @defun insert-image image &optional string area slice
5400 This function inserts @var{image} in the current buffer at point. The
5401 value @var{image} should be an image descriptor; it could be a value
5402 returned by @code{create-image}, or the value of a symbol defined with
5403 @code{defimage}. The argument @var{string} specifies the text to put
5404 in the buffer to hold the image. If it is omitted or @code{nil},
5405 @code{insert-image} uses @code{" "} by default.
5406
5407 The argument @var{area} specifies whether to put the image in a margin.
5408 If it is @code{left-margin}, the image appears in the left margin;
5409 @code{right-margin} specifies the right margin. If @var{area} is
5410 @code{nil} or omitted, the image is displayed at point within the
5411 buffer's text.
5412
5413 The argument @var{slice} specifies a slice of the image to insert. If
5414 @var{slice} is @code{nil} or omitted the whole image is inserted.
5415 Otherwise, @var{slice} is a list @code{(@var{x} @var{y} @var{width}
5416 @var{height})} which specifies the @var{x} and @var{y} positions and
5417 @var{width} and @var{height} of the image area to insert. Integer
5418 values are in units of pixels. A floating-point number in the range
5419 0.0--1.0 stands for that fraction of the width or height of the entire
5420 image.
5421
5422 Internally, this function inserts @var{string} in the buffer, and gives
5423 it a @code{display} property which specifies @var{image}. @xref{Display
5424 Property}.
5425 @end defun
5426
5427 @cindex slice, image
5428 @cindex image slice
5429 @defun insert-sliced-image image &optional string area rows cols
5430 This function inserts @var{image} in the current buffer at point, like
5431 @code{insert-image}, but splits the image into @var{rows}x@var{cols}
5432 equally sized slices.
5433
5434 Emacs displays each slice as a
5435 separate image, and allows more intuitive scrolling up/down, instead of
5436 jumping up/down the entire image when paging through a buffer that
5437 displays (large) images.
5438 @end defun
5439
5440 @defun put-image image pos &optional string area
5441 This function puts image @var{image} in front of @var{pos} in the
5442 current buffer. The argument @var{pos} should be an integer or a
5443 marker. It specifies the buffer position where the image should appear.
5444 The argument @var{string} specifies the text that should hold the image
5445 as an alternative to the default.
5446
5447 The argument @var{image} must be an image descriptor, perhaps returned
5448 by @code{create-image} or stored by @code{defimage}.
5449
5450 The argument @var{area} specifies whether to put the image in a margin.
5451 If it is @code{left-margin}, the image appears in the left margin;
5452 @code{right-margin} specifies the right margin. If @var{area} is
5453 @code{nil} or omitted, the image is displayed at point within the
5454 buffer's text.
5455
5456 Internally, this function creates an overlay, and gives it a
5457 @code{before-string} property containing text that has a @code{display}
5458 property whose value is the image. (Whew!)
5459 @end defun
5460
5461 @defun remove-images start end &optional buffer
5462 This function removes images in @var{buffer} between positions
5463 @var{start} and @var{end}. If @var{buffer} is omitted or @code{nil},
5464 images are removed from the current buffer.
5465
5466 This removes only images that were put into @var{buffer} the way
5467 @code{put-image} does it, not images that were inserted with
5468 @code{insert-image} or in other ways.
5469 @end defun
5470
5471 @defun image-size spec &optional pixels frame
5472 @cindex size of image
5473 This function returns the size of an image as a pair
5474 @w{@code{(@var{width} . @var{height})}}. @var{spec} is an image
5475 specification. @var{pixels} non-@code{nil} means return sizes measured
5476 in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in the default character size
5477 of @var{frame} (@pxref{Frame Font}). @var{frame} is the frame on which
5478 the image will be displayed. @var{frame} null or omitted means use the
5479 selected frame (@pxref{Input Focus}).
5480 @end defun
5481
5482 @defvar max-image-size
5483 This variable is used to define the maximum size of image that Emacs
5484 will load. Emacs will refuse to load (and display) any image that is
5485 larger than this limit.
5486
5487 If the value is an integer, it directly specifies the maximum
5488 image height and width, measured in pixels. If it is floating
5489 point, it specifies the maximum image height and width
5490 as a ratio to the frame height and width. If the value is
5491 non-numeric, there is no explicit limit on the size of images.
5492
5493 The purpose of this variable is to prevent unreasonably large images
5494 from accidentally being loaded into Emacs. It only takes effect the
5495 first time an image is loaded. Once an image is placed in the image
5496 cache, it can always be displayed, even if the value of
5497 @code{max-image-size} is subsequently changed (@pxref{Image Cache}).
5498 @end defvar
5499
5500 @node Multi-Frame Images
5501 @subsection Multi-Frame Images
5502 @cindex multi-frame images
5503
5504 @cindex animation
5505 @cindex image animation
5506 @cindex image frames
5507 Some image files can contain more than one image. We say that there
5508 are multiple ``frames'' in the image. At present, Emacs supports
5509 multiple frames for GIF, TIFF, and certain ImageMagick formats such as
5510 DJVM@.
5511
5512 The frames can be used either to represent multiple pages (this is
5513 usually the case with multi-frame TIFF files, for example), or to
5514 create animation (usually the case with multi-frame GIF files).
5515
5516 A multi-frame image has a property @code{:index}, whose value is an
5517 integer (counting from 0) that specifies which frame is being displayed.
5518
5519 @defun image-multi-frame-p image
5520 This function returns non-@code{nil} if @var{image} contains more than
5521 one frame. The actual return value is a cons @code{(@var{nimages}
5522 . @var{delay})}, where @var{nimages} is the number of frames and
5523 @var{delay} is the delay in seconds between them, or @code{nil}
5524 if the image does not specify a delay. Images that are intended to be
5525 animated usually specify a frame delay, whereas ones that are intended
5526 to be treated as multiple pages do not.
5527 @end defun
5528
5529 @defun image-current-frame image
5530 This function returns the index of the current frame number for
5531 @var{image}, counting from 0.
5532 @end defun
5533
5534 @defun image-show-frame image n &optional nocheck
5535 This function switches @var{image} to frame number @var{n}. It
5536 replaces a frame number outside the valid range with that of the end
5537 of the range, unless @var{nocheck} is non-@code{nil}. If @var{image}
5538 does not contain a frame with the specified number, the image displays
5539 as a hollow box.
5540 @end defun
5541
5542 @defun image-animate image &optional index limit
5543 This function animates @var{image}. The optional integer @var{index}
5544 specifies the frame from which to start (default 0). The optional
5545 argument @var{limit} controls the length of the animation. If omitted
5546 or @code{nil}, the image animates once only; if @code{t} it loops
5547 forever; if a number animation stops after that many seconds.
5548 @end defun
5549
5550 @vindex image-minimum-frame-delay
5551 @vindex image-default-frame-delay
5552 @noindent Animation operates by means of a timer. Note that Emacs imposes a
5553 minimum frame delay of 0.01 (@code{image-minimum-frame-delay}) seconds.
5554 If the image itself does not specify a delay, Emacs uses
5555 @code{image-default-frame-delay}.
5556
5557 @defun image-animate-timer image
5558 This function returns the timer responsible for animating @var{image},
5559 if there is one.
5560 @end defun
5561
5562
5563 @node Image Cache
5564 @subsection Image Cache
5565 @cindex image cache
5566
5567 Emacs caches images so that it can display them again more
5568 efficiently. When Emacs displays an image, it searches the image
5569 cache for an existing image specification @code{equal} to the desired
5570 specification. If a match is found, the image is displayed from the
5571 cache. Otherwise, Emacs loads the image normally.
5572
5573 @defun image-flush spec &optional frame
5574 This function removes the image with specification @var{spec} from the
5575 image cache of frame @var{frame}. Image specifications are compared
5576 using @code{equal}. If @var{frame} is @code{nil}, it defaults to the
5577 selected frame. If @var{frame} is @code{t}, the image is flushed on
5578 all existing frames.
5579
5580 In Emacs's current implementation, each graphical terminal possesses an
5581 image cache, which is shared by all the frames on that terminal
5582 (@pxref{Multiple Terminals}). Thus, refreshing an image in one frame
5583 also refreshes it in all other frames on the same terminal.
5584 @end defun
5585
5586 One use for @code{image-flush} is to tell Emacs about a change in an
5587 image file. If an image specification contains a @code{:file}
5588 property, the image is cached based on the file's contents when the
5589 image is first displayed. Even if the file subsequently changes,
5590 Emacs continues displaying the old version of the image. Calling
5591 @code{image-flush} flushes the image from the cache, forcing Emacs to
5592 re-read the file the next time it needs to display that image.
5593
5594 Another use for @code{image-flush} is for memory conservation. If
5595 your Lisp program creates a large number of temporary images over a
5596 period much shorter than @code{image-cache-eviction-delay} (see
5597 below), you can opt to flush unused images yourself, instead of
5598 waiting for Emacs to do it automatically.
5599
5600 @defun clear-image-cache &optional filter
5601 This function clears an image cache, removing all the images stored in
5602 it. If @var{filter} is omitted or @code{nil}, it clears the cache for
5603 the selected frame. If @var{filter} is a frame, it clears the cache
5604 for that frame. If @var{filter} is @code{t}, all image caches are
5605 cleared. Otherwise, @var{filter} is taken to be a file name, and all
5606 images associated with that file name are removed from all image
5607 caches.
5608 @end defun
5609
5610 If an image in the image cache has not been displayed for a specified
5611 period of time, Emacs removes it from the cache and frees the
5612 associated memory.
5613
5614 @defvar image-cache-eviction-delay
5615 This variable specifies the number of seconds an image can remain in
5616 the cache without being displayed. When an image is not displayed for
5617 this length of time, Emacs removes it from the image cache.
5618
5619 Under some circumstances, if the number of images in the cache grows
5620 too large, the actual eviction delay may be shorter than this.
5621
5622 If the value is @code{nil}, Emacs does not remove images from the cache
5623 except when you explicitly clear it. This mode can be useful for
5624 debugging.
5625 @end defvar
5626
5627 @node Xwidgets
5628 @section Embedded Native Widgets
5629 @cindex xwidget
5630 @cindex embedded widgets
5631 @cindex webkit browser widget
5632
5633 Emacs is able to display native widgets, such as GTK WebKit widgets,
5634 in Emacs buffers when it was built with the necessary support
5635 libraries and is running on a graphical terminal. To test whether
5636 Emacs supports display of embedded widgets, check that the
5637 @code{xwidget-internal} feature is available (@pxref{Named Features}).
5638
5639 To display an embedded widget in a buffer, you must first create an
5640 xwidget object, and then use that object as the display specifier
5641 in a @code{display} text or overlay property (@pxref{Display
5642 Property}).
5643
5644 @defun make-xwidget type title width height arguments &optional buffer
5645 This creates and returns an xwidget object. If
5646 @var{buffer} is omitted or @code{nil}, it defaults to the current
5647 buffer. If @var{buffer} names a buffer that doesn't exist, it will be
5648 created. The @var{type} identifies the type of the xwidget component,
5649 it can be one of the following:
5650
5651 @table @code
5652 @item webkit
5653 The WebKit component.
5654 @end table
5655
5656 The @var{width} and @var{height} arguments specify the widget size in
5657 pixels, and @var{title}, a string, specifies its title.
5658 @end defun
5659
5660 @defun xwidgetp object
5661 This function returns @code{t} if @var{object} is an xwidget,
5662 @code{nil} otherwise.
5663 @end defun
5664
5665 @defun xwidget-plist xwidget
5666 This function returns the property list of @var{xwidget}.
5667 @end defun
5668
5669 @defun set-xwidget-plist xwidget plist
5670 This function replaces the property list of @var{xwidget} with a new
5671 property list given by @var{plist}.
5672 @end defun
5673
5674 @defun xwidget-buffer xwidget
5675 This function returns the buffer of @var{xwidget}.
5676 @end defun
5677
5678 @defun get-buffer-xwidgets buffer
5679 This function returns a list of xwidget objects associated with the
5680 @var{buffer}, which can be specified as a buffer object or a name of
5681 an existing buffer, a string. The value is @code{nil} if @var{buffer}
5682 contains no xwidgets.
5683 @end defun
5684
5685 @defun xwidget-webkit-goto-uri xwidget uri
5686 This function browses the specified @var{uri} in the given
5687 @var{xwidget}. The @var{uri} is a string that specifies the name of a
5688 file or a URL. @c FIXME: What else can a URI specify in this context?
5689 @end defun
5690
5691 @defun xwidget-webkit-execute-script xwidget script
5692 This function causes the browser widget specified by @var{xwidget} to
5693 execute the specified JavaScript @code{script}.
5694 @end defun
5695
5696 @defun xwidget-webkit-execute-script-rv xwidget script &optional default
5697 This function executes the specified @var{script} like
5698 @code{xwidget-webkit-execute-script} does, but it also returns the
5699 script's return value as a string. If @var{script} doesn't return a
5700 value, this function returns @var{default}, or @code{nil} if
5701 @var{default} was omitted.
5702 @end defun
5703
5704 @defun xwidget-webkit-get-title xwidget
5705 This function returns the title of @var{xwidget} as a string.
5706 @end defun
5707
5708 @defun xwidget-resize xwidget width height
5709 This function resizes the specified @var{xwidget} to the size
5710 @var{width}x@var{height} pixels.
5711 @end defun
5712
5713 @defun xwidget-size-request xwidget
5714 This function returns the desired size of @var{xwidget} as a list of
5715 the form @code{(@var{width} @var{height})}. The dimensions are in
5716 pixels.
5717 @end defun
5718
5719 @defun xwidget-info xwidget
5720 This function returns the attributes of @var{xwidget} as a vector of
5721 the form @code{[@var{type} @var{title} @var{width} @var{height}]}.
5722 The attributes are usually determined by @code{make-xwidget} when the
5723 xwidget is created.
5724 @end defun
5725
5726 @defun set-xwidget-query-on-exit-flag xwidget flag
5727 This function allows you to arrange that Emacs will ask the user for
5728 confirmation before exiting or before killing a buffer that has
5729 @var{xwidget} associated with it. If @var{flag} is non-@code{nil},
5730 Emacs will query the user, otherwise it will not.
5731 @end defun
5732
5733 @defun xwidget-query-on-exit-flag xwidget
5734 This function returns the current setting of @var{xwidget}s
5735 query-on-exit flag, either @code{t} or @code{nil}.
5736 @end defun
5737
5738 @node Buttons
5739 @section Buttons
5740 @cindex buttons in buffers
5741 @cindex clickable buttons in buffers
5742
5743 The Button package defines functions for inserting and manipulating
5744 @dfn{buttons} that can be activated with the mouse or via keyboard
5745 commands. These buttons are typically used for various kinds of
5746 hyperlinks.
5747
5748 A button is essentially a set of text or overlay properties,
5749 attached to a stretch of text in a buffer. These properties are
5750 called @dfn{button properties}. One of these properties, the
5751 @dfn{action property}, specifies a function which is called when the
5752 user invokes the button using the keyboard or the mouse. The action
5753 function may examine the button and use its other properties as
5754 desired.
5755
5756 In some ways, the Button package duplicates the functionality in the
5757 Widget package. @xref{Top, , Introduction, widget, The Emacs Widget
5758 Library}. The advantage of the Button package is that it is faster,
5759 smaller, and simpler to program. From the point of view of the user,
5760 the interfaces produced by the two packages are very similar.
5761
5762 @menu
5763 * Button Properties:: Button properties with special meanings.
5764 * Button Types:: Defining common properties for classes of buttons.
5765 * Making Buttons:: Adding buttons to Emacs buffers.
5766 * Manipulating Buttons:: Getting and setting properties of buttons.
5767 * Button Buffer Commands:: Buffer-wide commands and bindings for buttons.
5768 @end menu
5769
5770 @node Button Properties
5771 @subsection Button Properties
5772 @cindex button properties
5773
5774 Each button has an associated list of properties defining its
5775 appearance and behavior, and other arbitrary properties may be used
5776 for application specific purposes. The following properties have
5777 special meaning to the Button package:
5778
5779 @table @code
5780 @item action
5781 @kindex action @r{(button property)}
5782 The function to call when the user invokes the button, which is passed
5783 the single argument @var{button}. By default this is @code{ignore},
5784 which does nothing.
5785
5786 @item mouse-action
5787 @kindex mouse-action @r{(button property)}
5788 This is similar to @code{action}, and when present, will be used
5789 instead of @code{action} for button invocations resulting from
5790 mouse-clicks (instead of the user hitting @key{RET}). If not
5791 present, mouse-clicks use @code{action} instead.
5792
5793 @item face
5794 @kindex face @r{(button property)}
5795 This is an Emacs face controlling how buttons of this type are
5796 displayed; by default this is the @code{button} face.
5797
5798 @item mouse-face
5799 @kindex mouse-face @r{(button property)}
5800 This is an additional face which controls appearance during
5801 mouse-overs (merged with the usual button face); by default this is
5802 the usual Emacs @code{highlight} face.
5803
5804 @item keymap
5805 @kindex keymap @r{(button property)}
5806 The button's keymap, defining bindings active within the button
5807 region. By default this is the usual button region keymap, stored
5808 in the variable @code{button-map}, which defines @key{RET} and
5809 @key{mouse-2} to invoke the button.
5810
5811 @item type
5812 @kindex type @r{(button property)}
5813 The button type. @xref{Button Types}.
5814
5815 @item help-echo
5816 @kindex help-index @r{(button property)}
5817 A string displayed by the Emacs tool-tip help system; by default,
5818 @code{"mouse-2, RET: Push this button"}.
5819
5820 @item follow-link
5821 @kindex follow-link @r{(button property)}
5822 The follow-link property, defining how a @key{Mouse-1} click behaves
5823 on this button, @xref{Clickable Text}.
5824
5825 @item button
5826 @kindex button @r{(button property)}
5827 All buttons have a non-@code{nil} @code{button} property, which may be useful
5828 in finding regions of text that comprise buttons (which is what the
5829 standard button functions do).
5830 @end table
5831
5832 There are other properties defined for the regions of text in a
5833 button, but these are not generally interesting for typical uses.
5834
5835 @node Button Types
5836 @subsection Button Types
5837 @cindex button types
5838
5839 Every button has a @dfn{button type}, which defines default values
5840 for the button's properties. Button types are arranged in a
5841 hierarchy, with specialized types inheriting from more general types,
5842 so that it's easy to define special-purpose types of buttons for
5843 specific tasks.
5844
5845 @defun define-button-type name &rest properties
5846 Define a button type called @var{name} (a symbol).
5847 The remaining arguments
5848 form a sequence of @var{property value} pairs, specifying default
5849 property values for buttons with this type (a button's type may be set
5850 by giving it a @code{type} property when creating the button, using
5851 the @code{:type} keyword argument).
5852
5853 In addition, the keyword argument @code{:supertype} may be used to
5854 specify a button-type from which @var{name} inherits its default
5855 property values. Note that this inheritance happens only when
5856 @var{name} is defined; subsequent changes to a supertype are not
5857 reflected in its subtypes.
5858 @end defun
5859
5860 Using @code{define-button-type} to define default properties for
5861 buttons is not necessary---buttons without any specified type use the
5862 built-in button-type @code{button}---but it is encouraged, since
5863 doing so usually makes the resulting code clearer and more efficient.
5864
5865 @node Making Buttons
5866 @subsection Making Buttons
5867 @cindex making buttons
5868
5869 Buttons are associated with a region of text, using an overlay or
5870 text properties to hold button-specific information, all of which are
5871 initialized from the button's type (which defaults to the built-in
5872 button type @code{button}). Like all Emacs text, the appearance of
5873 the button is governed by the @code{face} property; by default (via
5874 the @code{face} property inherited from the @code{button} button-type)
5875 this is a simple underline, like a typical web-page link.
5876
5877 For convenience, there are two sorts of button-creation functions,
5878 those that add button properties to an existing region of a buffer,
5879 called @code{make-...button}, and those that also insert the button
5880 text, called @code{insert-...button}.
5881
5882 The button-creation functions all take the @code{&rest} argument
5883 @var{properties}, which should be a sequence of @var{property value}
5884 pairs, specifying properties to add to the button; see @ref{Button
5885 Properties}. In addition, the keyword argument @code{:type} may be
5886 used to specify a button-type from which to inherit other properties;
5887 see @ref{Button Types}. Any properties not explicitly specified
5888 during creation will be inherited from the button's type (if the type
5889 defines such a property).
5890
5891 The following functions add a button using an overlay
5892 (@pxref{Overlays}) to hold the button properties:
5893
5894 @defun make-button beg end &rest properties
5895 This makes a button from @var{beg} to @var{end} in the
5896 current buffer, and returns it.
5897 @end defun
5898
5899 @defun insert-button label &rest properties
5900 This insert a button with the label @var{label} at point,
5901 and returns it.
5902 @end defun
5903
5904 The following functions are similar, but using text properties
5905 (@pxref{Text Properties}) to hold the button properties. Such buttons
5906 do not add markers to the buffer, so editing in the buffer does not
5907 slow down if there is an extremely large numbers of buttons. However,
5908 if there is an existing face text property on the text (e.g., a face
5909 assigned by Font Lock mode), the button face may not be visible. Both
5910 of these functions return the starting position of the new button.
5911
5912 @defun make-text-button beg end &rest properties
5913 This makes a button from @var{beg} to @var{end} in the current buffer,
5914 using text properties.
5915 @end defun
5916
5917 @defun insert-text-button label &rest properties
5918 This inserts a button with the label @var{label} at point, using text
5919 properties.
5920 @end defun
5921
5922 @node Manipulating Buttons
5923 @subsection Manipulating Buttons
5924 @cindex manipulating buttons
5925
5926 These are functions for getting and setting properties of buttons.
5927 Often these are used by a button's invocation function to determine
5928 what to do.
5929
5930 Where a @var{button} parameter is specified, it means an object
5931 referring to a specific button, either an overlay (for overlay
5932 buttons), or a buffer-position or marker (for text property buttons).
5933 Such an object is passed as the first argument to a button's
5934 invocation function when it is invoked.
5935
5936 @defun button-start button
5937 Return the position at which @var{button} starts.
5938 @end defun
5939
5940 @defun button-end button
5941 Return the position at which @var{button} ends.
5942 @end defun
5943
5944 @defun button-get button prop
5945 Get the property of button @var{button} named @var{prop}.
5946 @end defun
5947
5948 @defun button-put button prop val
5949 Set @var{button}'s @var{prop} property to @var{val}.
5950 @end defun
5951
5952 @defun button-activate button &optional use-mouse-action
5953 Call @var{button}'s @code{action} property (i.e., invoke the function
5954 that is the value of that property, passing it the single argument
5955 @var{button}). If @var{use-mouse-action} is non-@code{nil}, try to
5956 invoke the button's @code{mouse-action} property instead of
5957 @code{action}; if the button has no @code{mouse-action} property, use
5958 @code{action} as normal.
5959 @end defun
5960
5961 @defun button-label button
5962 Return @var{button}'s text label.
5963 @end defun
5964
5965 @defun button-type button
5966 Return @var{button}'s button-type.
5967 @end defun
5968
5969 @defun button-has-type-p button type
5970 Return @code{t} if @var{button} has button-type @var{type}, or one of
5971 @var{type}'s subtypes.
5972 @end defun
5973
5974 @defun button-at pos
5975 Return the button at position @var{pos} in the current buffer, or
5976 @code{nil}. If the button at @var{pos} is a text property button, the
5977 return value is a marker pointing to @var{pos}.
5978 @end defun
5979
5980 @defun button-type-put type prop val
5981 Set the button-type @var{type}'s @var{prop} property to @var{val}.
5982 @end defun
5983
5984 @defun button-type-get type prop
5985 Get the property of button-type @var{type} named @var{prop}.
5986 @end defun
5987
5988 @defun button-type-subtype-p type supertype
5989 Return @code{t} if button-type @var{type} is a subtype of @var{supertype}.
5990 @end defun
5991
5992 @node Button Buffer Commands
5993 @subsection Button Buffer Commands
5994 @cindex button buffer commands
5995
5996 These are commands and functions for locating and operating on
5997 buttons in an Emacs buffer.
5998
5999 @code{push-button} is the command that a user uses to actually push
6000 a button, and is bound by default in the button itself to @key{RET}
6001 and to @key{mouse-2} using a local keymap in the button's overlay or
6002 text properties. Commands that are useful outside the buttons itself,
6003 such as @code{forward-button} and @code{backward-button} are
6004 additionally available in the keymap stored in
6005 @code{button-buffer-map}; a mode which uses buttons may want to use
6006 @code{button-buffer-map} as a parent keymap for its keymap.
6007
6008 If the button has a non-@code{nil} @code{follow-link} property, and
6009 @code{mouse-1-click-follows-link} is set, a quick @key{Mouse-1} click
6010 will also activate the @code{push-button} command.
6011 @xref{Clickable Text}.
6012
6013 @deffn Command push-button &optional pos use-mouse-action
6014 Perform the action specified by a button at location @var{pos}.
6015 @var{pos} may be either a buffer position or a mouse-event. If
6016 @var{use-mouse-action} is non-@code{nil}, or @var{pos} is a
6017 mouse-event (@pxref{Mouse Events}), try to invoke the button's
6018 @code{mouse-action} property instead of @code{action}; if the button
6019 has no @code{mouse-action} property, use @code{action} as normal.
6020 @var{pos} defaults to point, except when @code{push-button} is invoked
6021 interactively as the result of a mouse-event, in which case, the mouse
6022 event's position is used. If there's no button at @var{pos}, do
6023 nothing and return @code{nil}, otherwise return @code{t}.
6024 @end deffn
6025
6026 @deffn Command forward-button n &optional wrap display-message
6027 Move to the @var{n}th next button, or @var{n}th previous button if
6028 @var{n} is negative. If @var{n} is zero, move to the start of any
6029 button at point. If @var{wrap} is non-@code{nil}, moving past either
6030 end of the buffer continues from the other end. If
6031 @var{display-message} is non-@code{nil}, the button's help-echo string
6032 is displayed. Any button with a non-@code{nil} @code{skip} property
6033 is skipped over. Returns the button found.
6034 @end deffn
6035
6036 @deffn Command backward-button n &optional wrap display-message
6037 Move to the @var{n}th previous button, or @var{n}th next button if
6038 @var{n} is negative. If @var{n} is zero, move to the start of any
6039 button at point. If @var{wrap} is non-@code{nil}, moving past either
6040 end of the buffer continues from the other end. If
6041 @var{display-message} is non-@code{nil}, the button's help-echo string
6042 is displayed. Any button with a non-@code{nil} @code{skip} property
6043 is skipped over. Returns the button found.
6044 @end deffn
6045
6046 @defun next-button pos &optional count-current
6047 @defunx previous-button pos &optional count-current
6048 Return the next button after (for @code{next-button}) or before (for
6049 @code{previous-button}) position @var{pos} in the current buffer. If
6050 @var{count-current} is non-@code{nil}, count any button at @var{pos}
6051 in the search, instead of starting at the next button.
6052 @end defun
6053
6054 @node Abstract Display
6055 @section Abstract Display
6056 @cindex ewoc
6057 @cindex display, abstract
6058 @cindex display, arbitrary objects
6059 @cindex model/view/controller
6060 @cindex view part, model/view/controller
6061
6062 The Ewoc package constructs buffer text that represents a structure
6063 of Lisp objects, and updates the text to follow changes in that
6064 structure. This is like the ``view'' component in the
6065 ``model--view--controller'' design paradigm. Ewoc means ``Emacs's
6066 Widget for Object Collections''.
6067
6068 An @dfn{ewoc} is a structure that organizes information required to
6069 construct buffer text that represents certain Lisp data. The buffer
6070 text of the ewoc has three parts, in order: first, fixed @dfn{header}
6071 text; next, textual descriptions of a series of data elements (Lisp
6072 objects that you specify); and last, fixed @dfn{footer} text.
6073 Specifically, an ewoc contains information on:
6074
6075 @itemize @bullet
6076 @item
6077 The buffer which its text is generated in.
6078
6079 @item
6080 The text's start position in the buffer.
6081
6082 @item
6083 The header and footer strings.
6084
6085 @item
6086 @cindex node, ewoc
6087 @c or "@cindex node, abstract display"?
6088 A doubly-linked chain of @dfn{nodes}, each of which contains:
6089
6090 @itemize
6091 @item
6092 A @dfn{data element}, a single Lisp object.
6093
6094 @item
6095 Links to the preceding and following nodes in the chain.
6096 @end itemize
6097
6098 @item
6099 A @dfn{pretty-printer} function which is responsible for
6100 inserting the textual representation of a data
6101 element value into the current buffer.
6102 @end itemize
6103
6104 Typically, you define an ewoc with @code{ewoc-create}, and then pass
6105 the resulting ewoc structure to other functions in the Ewoc package to
6106 build nodes within it, and display it in the buffer. Once it is
6107 displayed in the buffer, other functions determine the correspondence
6108 between buffer positions and nodes, move point from one node's textual
6109 representation to another, and so forth. @xref{Abstract Display
6110 Functions}.
6111
6112 @cindex encapsulation, ewoc
6113 @c or "@cindex encapsulation, abstract display"?
6114 A node @dfn{encapsulates} a data element much the way a variable
6115 holds a value. Normally, encapsulation occurs as a part of adding a
6116 node to the ewoc. You can retrieve the data element value and place a
6117 new value in its place, like so:
6118
6119 @lisp
6120 (ewoc-data @var{node})
6121 @result{} value
6122
6123 (ewoc-set-data @var{node} @var{new-value})
6124 @result{} @var{new-value}
6125 @end lisp
6126
6127 @noindent
6128 You can also use, as the data element value, a Lisp object (list or
6129 vector) that is a container for the real value, or an index into
6130 some other structure. The example (@pxref{Abstract Display Example})
6131 uses the latter approach.
6132
6133 When the data changes, you will want to update the text in the
6134 buffer. You can update all nodes by calling @code{ewoc-refresh}, or
6135 just specific nodes using @code{ewoc-invalidate}, or all nodes
6136 satisfying a predicate using @code{ewoc-map}. Alternatively, you can
6137 delete invalid nodes using @code{ewoc-delete} or @code{ewoc-filter},
6138 and add new nodes in their place. Deleting a node from an ewoc deletes
6139 its associated textual description from buffer, as well.
6140
6141 @menu
6142 * Abstract Display Functions:: Functions in the Ewoc package.
6143 * Abstract Display Example:: Example of using Ewoc.
6144 @end menu
6145
6146 @node Abstract Display Functions
6147 @subsection Abstract Display Functions
6148
6149 In this subsection, @var{ewoc} and @var{node} stand for the
6150 structures described above (@pxref{Abstract Display}), while
6151 @var{data} stands for an arbitrary Lisp object used as a data element.
6152
6153 @defun ewoc-create pretty-printer &optional header footer nosep
6154 This constructs and returns a new ewoc, with no nodes (and thus no data
6155 elements). @var{pretty-printer} should be a function that takes one
6156 argument, a data element of the sort you plan to use in this ewoc, and
6157 inserts its textual description at point using @code{insert} (and never
6158 @code{insert-before-markers}, because that would interfere with the
6159 Ewoc package's internal mechanisms).
6160
6161 Normally, a newline is automatically inserted after the header,
6162 the footer and every node's textual description. If @var{nosep}
6163 is non-@code{nil}, no newline is inserted. This may be useful for
6164 displaying an entire ewoc on a single line, for example, or for
6165 making nodes invisible by arranging for @var{pretty-printer}
6166 to do nothing for those nodes.
6167
6168 An ewoc maintains its text in the buffer that is current when
6169 you create it, so switch to the intended buffer before calling
6170 @code{ewoc-create}.
6171 @end defun
6172
6173 @defun ewoc-buffer ewoc
6174 This returns the buffer where @var{ewoc} maintains its text.
6175 @end defun
6176
6177 @defun ewoc-get-hf ewoc
6178 This returns a cons cell @code{(@var{header} . @var{footer})}
6179 made from @var{ewoc}'s header and footer.
6180 @end defun
6181
6182 @defun ewoc-set-hf ewoc header footer
6183 This sets the header and footer of @var{ewoc} to the strings
6184 @var{header} and @var{footer}, respectively.
6185 @end defun
6186
6187 @defun ewoc-enter-first ewoc data
6188 @defunx ewoc-enter-last ewoc data
6189 These add a new node encapsulating @var{data}, putting it, respectively,
6190 at the beginning or end of @var{ewoc}'s chain of nodes.
6191 @end defun
6192
6193 @defun ewoc-enter-before ewoc node data
6194 @defunx ewoc-enter-after ewoc node data
6195 These add a new node encapsulating @var{data}, adding it to
6196 @var{ewoc} before or after @var{node}, respectively.
6197 @end defun
6198
6199 @defun ewoc-prev ewoc node
6200 @defunx ewoc-next ewoc node
6201 These return, respectively, the previous node and the next node of @var{node}
6202 in @var{ewoc}.
6203 @end defun
6204
6205 @defun ewoc-nth ewoc n
6206 This returns the node in @var{ewoc} found at zero-based index @var{n}.
6207 A negative @var{n} means count from the end. @code{ewoc-nth} returns
6208 @code{nil} if @var{n} is out of range.
6209 @end defun
6210
6211 @defun ewoc-data node
6212 This extracts the data encapsulated by @var{node} and returns it.
6213 @end defun
6214
6215 @defun ewoc-set-data node data
6216 This sets the data encapsulated by @var{node} to @var{data}.
6217 @end defun
6218
6219 @defun ewoc-locate ewoc &optional pos guess
6220 This determines the node in @var{ewoc} which contains point (or
6221 @var{pos} if specified), and returns that node. If @var{ewoc} has no
6222 nodes, it returns @code{nil}. If @var{pos} is before the first node,
6223 it returns the first node; if @var{pos} is after the last node, it returns
6224 the last node. The optional third arg @var{guess}
6225 should be a node that is likely to be near @var{pos}; this doesn't
6226 alter the result, but makes the function run faster.
6227 @end defun
6228
6229 @defun ewoc-location node
6230 This returns the start position of @var{node}.
6231 @end defun
6232
6233 @defun ewoc-goto-prev ewoc arg
6234 @defunx ewoc-goto-next ewoc arg
6235 These move point to the previous or next, respectively, @var{arg}th node
6236 in @var{ewoc}. @code{ewoc-goto-prev} does not move if it is already at
6237 the first node or if @var{ewoc} is empty, whereas @code{ewoc-goto-next}
6238 moves past the last node, returning @code{nil}. Excepting this special
6239 case, these functions return the node moved to.
6240 @end defun
6241
6242 @defun ewoc-goto-node ewoc node
6243 This moves point to the start of @var{node} in @var{ewoc}.
6244 @end defun
6245
6246 @defun ewoc-refresh ewoc
6247 This function regenerates the text of @var{ewoc}. It works by
6248 deleting the text between the header and the footer, i.e., all the
6249 data elements' representations, and then calling the pretty-printer
6250 function for each node, one by one, in order.
6251 @end defun
6252
6253 @defun ewoc-invalidate ewoc &rest nodes
6254 This is similar to @code{ewoc-refresh}, except that only @var{nodes} in
6255 @var{ewoc} are updated instead of the entire set.
6256 @end defun
6257
6258 @defun ewoc-delete ewoc &rest nodes
6259 This deletes each node in @var{nodes} from @var{ewoc}.
6260 @end defun
6261
6262 @defun ewoc-filter ewoc predicate &rest args
6263 This calls @var{predicate} for each data element in @var{ewoc} and
6264 deletes those nodes for which @var{predicate} returns @code{nil}.
6265 Any @var{args} are passed to @var{predicate}.
6266 @end defun
6267
6268 @defun ewoc-collect ewoc predicate &rest args
6269 This calls @var{predicate} for each data element in @var{ewoc}
6270 and returns a list of those elements for which @var{predicate}
6271 returns non-@code{nil}. The elements in the list are ordered
6272 as in the buffer. Any @var{args} are passed to @var{predicate}.
6273 @end defun
6274
6275 @defun ewoc-map map-function ewoc &rest args
6276 This calls @var{map-function} for each data element in @var{ewoc} and
6277 updates those nodes for which @var{map-function} returns non-@code{nil}.
6278 Any @var{args} are passed to @var{map-function}.
6279 @end defun
6280
6281 @node Abstract Display Example
6282 @subsection Abstract Display Example
6283
6284 Here is a simple example using functions of the ewoc package to
6285 implement a @dfn{color components} display, an area in a buffer that
6286 represents a vector of three integers (itself representing a 24-bit RGB
6287 value) in various ways.
6288
6289 @example
6290 (setq colorcomp-ewoc nil
6291 colorcomp-data nil
6292 colorcomp-mode-map nil
6293 colorcomp-labels ["Red" "Green" "Blue"])
6294
6295 (defun colorcomp-pp (data)
6296 (if data
6297 (let ((comp (aref colorcomp-data data)))
6298 (insert (aref colorcomp-labels data) "\t: #x"
6299 (format "%02X" comp) " "
6300 (make-string (ash comp -2) ?#) "\n"))
6301 (let ((cstr (format "#%02X%02X%02X"
6302 (aref colorcomp-data 0)
6303 (aref colorcomp-data 1)
6304 (aref colorcomp-data 2)))
6305 (samp " (sample text) "))
6306 (insert "Color\t: "
6307 (propertize samp 'face
6308 `(foreground-color . ,cstr))
6309 (propertize samp 'face
6310 `(background-color . ,cstr))
6311 "\n"))))
6312
6313 (defun colorcomp (color)
6314 "Allow fiddling with COLOR in a new buffer.
6315 The buffer is in Color Components mode."
6316 (interactive "sColor (name or #RGB or #RRGGBB): ")
6317 (when (string= "" color)
6318 (setq color "green"))
6319 (unless (color-values color)
6320 (error "No such color: %S" color))
6321 (switch-to-buffer
6322 (generate-new-buffer (format "originally: %s" color)))
6323 (kill-all-local-variables)
6324 (setq major-mode 'colorcomp-mode
6325 mode-name "Color Components")
6326 (use-local-map colorcomp-mode-map)
6327 (erase-buffer)
6328 (buffer-disable-undo)
6329 (let ((data (apply 'vector (mapcar (lambda (n) (ash n -8))
6330 (color-values color))))
6331 (ewoc (ewoc-create 'colorcomp-pp
6332 "\nColor Components\n\n"
6333 (substitute-command-keys
6334 "\n\\@{colorcomp-mode-map@}"))))
6335 (set (make-local-variable 'colorcomp-data) data)
6336 (set (make-local-variable 'colorcomp-ewoc) ewoc)
6337 (ewoc-enter-last ewoc 0)
6338 (ewoc-enter-last ewoc 1)
6339 (ewoc-enter-last ewoc 2)
6340 (ewoc-enter-last ewoc nil)))
6341 @end example
6342
6343 @cindex controller part, model/view/controller
6344 This example can be extended to be a color selection widget (in
6345 other words, the ``controller'' part of the ``model--view--controller''
6346 design paradigm) by defining commands to modify @code{colorcomp-data}
6347 and to finish the selection process, and a keymap to tie it all
6348 together conveniently.
6349
6350 @smallexample
6351 (defun colorcomp-mod (index limit delta)
6352 (let ((cur (aref colorcomp-data index)))
6353 (unless (= limit cur)
6354 (aset colorcomp-data index (+ cur delta)))
6355 (ewoc-invalidate
6356 colorcomp-ewoc
6357 (ewoc-nth colorcomp-ewoc index)
6358 (ewoc-nth colorcomp-ewoc -1))))
6359
6360 (defun colorcomp-R-more () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 0 255 1))
6361 (defun colorcomp-G-more () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 1 255 1))
6362 (defun colorcomp-B-more () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 2 255 1))
6363 (defun colorcomp-R-less () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 0 0 -1))
6364 (defun colorcomp-G-less () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 1 0 -1))
6365 (defun colorcomp-B-less () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 2 0 -1))
6366
6367 (defun colorcomp-copy-as-kill-and-exit ()
6368 "Copy the color components into the kill ring and kill the buffer.
6369 The string is formatted #RRGGBB (hash followed by six hex digits)."
6370 (interactive)
6371 (kill-new (format "#%02X%02X%02X"
6372 (aref colorcomp-data 0)
6373 (aref colorcomp-data 1)
6374 (aref colorcomp-data 2)))
6375 (kill-buffer nil))
6376
6377 (setq colorcomp-mode-map
6378 (let ((m (make-sparse-keymap)))
6379 (suppress-keymap m)
6380 (define-key m "i" 'colorcomp-R-less)
6381 (define-key m "o" 'colorcomp-R-more)
6382 (define-key m "k" 'colorcomp-G-less)
6383 (define-key m "l" 'colorcomp-G-more)
6384 (define-key m "," 'colorcomp-B-less)
6385 (define-key m "." 'colorcomp-B-more)
6386 (define-key m " " 'colorcomp-copy-as-kill-and-exit)
6387 m))
6388 @end smallexample
6389
6390 Note that we never modify the data in each node, which is fixed when the
6391 ewoc is created to be either @code{nil} or an index into the vector
6392 @code{colorcomp-data}, the actual color components.
6393
6394 @node Blinking
6395 @section Blinking Parentheses
6396 @cindex parenthesis matching
6397 @cindex blinking parentheses
6398 @cindex balancing parentheses
6399
6400 This section describes the mechanism by which Emacs shows a matching
6401 open parenthesis when the user inserts a close parenthesis.
6402
6403 @defvar blink-paren-function
6404 The value of this variable should be a function (of no arguments) to
6405 be called whenever a character with close parenthesis syntax is inserted.
6406 The value of @code{blink-paren-function} may be @code{nil}, in which
6407 case nothing is done.
6408 @end defvar
6409
6410 @defopt blink-matching-paren
6411 If this variable is @code{nil}, then @code{blink-matching-open} does
6412 nothing.
6413 @end defopt
6414
6415 @defopt blink-matching-paren-distance
6416 This variable specifies the maximum distance to scan for a matching
6417 parenthesis before giving up.
6418 @end defopt
6419
6420 @defopt blink-matching-delay
6421 This variable specifies the number of seconds to keep indicating the
6422 matching parenthesis. A fraction of a second often gives good
6423 results, but the default is 1, which works on all systems.
6424 @end defopt
6425
6426 @deffn Command blink-matching-open
6427 This function is the default value of @code{blink-paren-function}. It
6428 assumes that point follows a character with close parenthesis syntax
6429 and applies the appropriate effect momentarily to the matching opening
6430 character. If that character is not already on the screen, it
6431 displays the character's context in the echo area. To avoid long
6432 delays, this function does not search farther than
6433 @code{blink-matching-paren-distance} characters.
6434
6435 Here is an example of calling this function explicitly.
6436
6437 @smallexample
6438 @group
6439 (defun interactive-blink-matching-open ()
6440 "Indicate momentarily the start of parenthesized sexp before point."
6441 (interactive)
6442 @end group
6443 @group
6444 (let ((blink-matching-paren-distance
6445 (buffer-size))
6446 (blink-matching-paren t))
6447 (blink-matching-open)))
6448 @end group
6449 @end smallexample
6450 @end deffn
6451
6452 @node Character Display
6453 @section Character Display
6454
6455 This section describes how characters are actually displayed by
6456 Emacs. Typically, a character is displayed as a @dfn{glyph} (a
6457 graphical symbol which occupies one character position on the screen),
6458 whose appearance corresponds to the character itself. For example,
6459 the character @samp{a} (character code 97) is displayed as @samp{a}.
6460 Some characters, however, are displayed specially. For example, the
6461 formfeed character (character code 12) is usually displayed as a
6462 sequence of two glyphs, @samp{^L}, while the newline character
6463 (character code 10) starts a new screen line.
6464
6465 You can modify how each character is displayed by defining a
6466 @dfn{display table}, which maps each character code into a sequence of
6467 glyphs. @xref{Display Tables}.
6468
6469 @menu
6470 * Usual Display:: The usual conventions for displaying characters.
6471 * Display Tables:: What a display table consists of.
6472 * Active Display Table:: How Emacs selects a display table to use.
6473 * Glyphs:: How to define a glyph, and what glyphs mean.
6474 * Glyphless Chars:: How glyphless characters are drawn.
6475 @end menu
6476
6477 @node Usual Display
6478 @subsection Usual Display Conventions
6479
6480 Here are the conventions for displaying each character code (in the
6481 absence of a display table, which can override these
6482 @iftex
6483 conventions).
6484 @end iftex
6485 @ifnottex
6486 conventions; @pxref{Display Tables}).
6487 @end ifnottex
6488
6489 @cindex printable ASCII characters
6490 @itemize @bullet
6491 @item
6492 The @dfn{printable @acronym{ASCII} characters}, character codes 32
6493 through 126 (consisting of numerals, English letters, and symbols like
6494 @samp{#}) are displayed literally.
6495
6496 @item
6497 The tab character (character code 9) displays as whitespace stretching
6498 up to the next tab stop column. @xref{Text Display,,, emacs, The GNU
6499 Emacs Manual}. The variable @code{tab-width} controls the number of
6500 spaces per tab stop (see below).
6501
6502 @item
6503 The newline character (character code 10) has a special effect: it
6504 ends the preceding line and starts a new line.
6505
6506 @cindex ASCII control characters
6507 @item
6508 The non-printable @dfn{@acronym{ASCII} control characters}---character
6509 codes 0 through 31, as well as the @key{DEL} character (character code
6510 127)---display in one of two ways according to the variable
6511 @code{ctl-arrow}. If this variable is non-@code{nil} (the default),
6512 these characters are displayed as sequences of two glyphs, where the
6513 first glyph is @samp{^} (a display table can specify a glyph to use
6514 instead of @samp{^}); e.g., the @key{DEL} character is displayed as
6515 @samp{^?}.
6516
6517 If @code{ctl-arrow} is @code{nil}, these characters are displayed as
6518 octal escapes (see below).
6519
6520 This rule also applies to carriage return (character code 13), if that
6521 character appears in the buffer. But carriage returns usually do not
6522 appear in buffer text; they are eliminated as part of end-of-line
6523 conversion (@pxref{Coding System Basics}).
6524
6525 @cindex octal escapes
6526 @item
6527 @dfn{Raw bytes} are non-@acronym{ASCII} characters with codes 128
6528 through 255 (@pxref{Text Representations}). These characters display
6529 as @dfn{octal escapes}: sequences of four glyphs, where the first
6530 glyph is the @acronym{ASCII} code for @samp{\}, and the others are
6531 digit characters representing the character code in octal. (A display
6532 table can specify a glyph to use instead of @samp{\}.)
6533
6534 @item
6535 Each non-@acronym{ASCII} character with code above 255 is displayed
6536 literally, if the terminal supports it. If the terminal does not
6537 support it, the character is said to be @dfn{glyphless}, and it is
6538 usually displayed using a placeholder glyph. For example, if a
6539 graphical terminal has no font for a character, Emacs usually displays
6540 a box containing the character code in hexadecimal. @xref{Glyphless
6541 Chars}.
6542 @end itemize
6543
6544 The above display conventions apply even when there is a display
6545 table, for any character whose entry in the active display table is
6546 @code{nil}. Thus, when you set up a display table, you need only
6547 specify the characters for which you want special behavior.
6548
6549 The following variables affect how certain characters are displayed
6550 on the screen. Since they change the number of columns the characters
6551 occupy, they also affect the indentation functions. They also affect
6552 how the mode line is displayed; if you want to force redisplay of the
6553 mode line using the new values, call the function
6554 @code{force-mode-line-update} (@pxref{Mode Line Format}).
6555
6556 @defopt ctl-arrow
6557 @cindex control characters in display
6558 This buffer-local variable controls how control characters are
6559 displayed. If it is non-@code{nil}, they are displayed as a caret
6560 followed by the character: @samp{^A}. If it is @code{nil}, they are
6561 displayed as octal escapes: a backslash followed by three octal
6562 digits, as in @samp{\001}.
6563 @end defopt
6564
6565 @defopt tab-width
6566 The value of this buffer-local variable is the spacing between tab
6567 stops used for displaying tab characters in Emacs buffers. The value
6568 is in units of columns, and the default is 8. Note that this feature
6569 is completely independent of the user-settable tab stops used by the
6570 command @code{tab-to-tab-stop}. @xref{Indent Tabs}.
6571 @end defopt
6572
6573 @node Display Tables
6574 @subsection Display Tables
6575
6576 @cindex display table
6577 A display table is a special-purpose char-table
6578 (@pxref{Char-Tables}), with @code{display-table} as its subtype, which
6579 is used to override the usual character display conventions. This
6580 section describes how to make, inspect, and assign elements to a
6581 display table object.
6582
6583 @defun make-display-table
6584 This creates and returns a display table. The table initially has
6585 @code{nil} in all elements.
6586 @end defun
6587
6588 The ordinary elements of the display table are indexed by character
6589 codes; the element at index @var{c} says how to display the character
6590 code @var{c}. The value should be @code{nil} (which means to display
6591 the character @var{c} according to the usual display conventions;
6592 @pxref{Usual Display}), or a vector of glyph codes (which means to
6593 display the character @var{c} as those glyphs; @pxref{Glyphs}).
6594
6595 @strong{Warning:} if you use the display table to change the display
6596 of newline characters, the whole buffer will be displayed as one long
6597 line.
6598
6599 The display table also has six @dfn{extra slots} which serve special
6600 purposes. Here is a table of their meanings; @code{nil} in any slot
6601 means to use the default for that slot, as stated below.
6602
6603 @table @asis
6604 @item 0
6605 The glyph for the end of a truncated screen line (the default for this
6606 is @samp{$}). @xref{Glyphs}. On graphical terminals, Emacs uses
6607 arrows in the fringes to indicate truncation, so the display table has
6608 no effect.
6609
6610 @item 1
6611 The glyph for the end of a continued line (the default is @samp{\}).
6612 On graphical terminals, Emacs uses curved arrows in the fringes to
6613 indicate continuation, so the display table has no effect.
6614
6615 @item 2
6616 The glyph for indicating a character displayed as an octal character
6617 code (the default is @samp{\}).
6618
6619 @item 3
6620 The glyph for indicating a control character (the default is @samp{^}).
6621
6622 @item 4
6623 A vector of glyphs for indicating the presence of invisible lines (the
6624 default is @samp{...}). @xref{Selective Display}.
6625
6626 @item 5
6627 The glyph used to draw the border between side-by-side windows (the
6628 default is @samp{|}). @xref{Splitting Windows}. This takes effect only
6629 when there are no scroll bars; if scroll bars are supported and in use,
6630 a scroll bar separates the two windows.
6631 @end table
6632
6633 For example, here is how to construct a display table that mimics
6634 the effect of setting @code{ctl-arrow} to a non-@code{nil} value
6635 (@pxref{Glyphs}, for the function @code{make-glyph-code}):
6636
6637 @example
6638 (setq disptab (make-display-table))
6639 (dotimes (i 32)
6640 (or (= i ?\t)
6641 (= i ?\n)
6642 (aset disptab i
6643 (vector (make-glyph-code ?^ 'escape-glyph)
6644 (make-glyph-code (+ i 64) 'escape-glyph)))))
6645 (aset disptab 127
6646 (vector (make-glyph-code ?^ 'escape-glyph)
6647 (make-glyph-code ?? 'escape-glyph)))))
6648 @end example
6649
6650 @defun display-table-slot display-table slot
6651 This function returns the value of the extra slot @var{slot} of
6652 @var{display-table}. The argument @var{slot} may be a number from 0 to
6653 5 inclusive, or a slot name (symbol). Valid symbols are
6654 @code{truncation}, @code{wrap}, @code{escape}, @code{control},
6655 @code{selective-display}, and @code{vertical-border}.
6656 @end defun
6657
6658 @defun set-display-table-slot display-table slot value
6659 This function stores @var{value} in the extra slot @var{slot} of
6660 @var{display-table}. The argument @var{slot} may be a number from 0 to
6661 5 inclusive, or a slot name (symbol). Valid symbols are
6662 @code{truncation}, @code{wrap}, @code{escape}, @code{control},
6663 @code{selective-display}, and @code{vertical-border}.
6664 @end defun
6665
6666 @defun describe-display-table display-table
6667 This function displays a description of the display table
6668 @var{display-table} in a help buffer.
6669 @end defun
6670
6671 @deffn Command describe-current-display-table
6672 This command displays a description of the current display table in a
6673 help buffer.
6674 @end deffn
6675
6676 @node Active Display Table
6677 @subsection Active Display Table
6678 @cindex active display table
6679
6680 Each window can specify a display table, and so can each buffer.
6681 The window's display table, if there is one, takes precedence over the
6682 buffer's display table. If neither exists, Emacs tries to use the
6683 standard display table; if that is @code{nil}, Emacs uses the usual
6684 character display conventions (@pxref{Usual Display}).
6685
6686 Note that display tables affect how the mode line is displayed, so
6687 if you want to force redisplay of the mode line using a new display
6688 table, call @code{force-mode-line-update} (@pxref{Mode Line Format}).
6689
6690 @defun window-display-table &optional window
6691 This function returns @var{window}'s display table, or @code{nil} if
6692 there is none. The default for @var{window} is the selected window.
6693 @end defun
6694
6695 @defun set-window-display-table window table
6696 This function sets the display table of @var{window} to @var{table}.
6697 The argument @var{table} should be either a display table or
6698 @code{nil}.
6699 @end defun
6700
6701 @defvar buffer-display-table
6702 This variable is automatically buffer-local in all buffers; its value
6703 specifies the buffer's display table. If it is @code{nil}, there is
6704 no buffer display table.
6705 @end defvar
6706
6707 @defvar standard-display-table
6708 The value of this variable is the standard display table, which is
6709 used when Emacs is displaying a buffer in a window with neither a
6710 window display table nor a buffer display table defined, or when Emacs
6711 is outputting text to the standard output or error streams. Although its
6712 default is typically @code{nil}, in an interactive session if the
6713 terminal cannot display curved quotes, its default maps curved quotes
6714 to ASCII approximations. @xref{Keys in Documentation}.
6715 @end defvar
6716
6717 The @file{disp-table} library defines several functions for changing
6718 the standard display table.
6719
6720 @node Glyphs
6721 @subsection Glyphs
6722 @cindex glyph
6723
6724 @cindex glyph code
6725 A @dfn{glyph} is a graphical symbol which occupies a single
6726 character position on the screen. Each glyph is represented in Lisp
6727 as a @dfn{glyph code}, which specifies a character and optionally a
6728 face to display it in (@pxref{Faces}). The main use of glyph codes is
6729 as the entries of display tables (@pxref{Display Tables}). The
6730 following functions are used to manipulate glyph codes:
6731
6732 @defun make-glyph-code char &optional face
6733 This function returns a glyph code representing char @var{char} with
6734 face @var{face}. If @var{face} is omitted or @code{nil}, the glyph
6735 uses the default face; in that case, the glyph code is an integer. If
6736 @var{face} is non-@code{nil}, the glyph code is not necessarily an
6737 integer object.
6738 @end defun
6739
6740 @defun glyph-char glyph
6741 This function returns the character of glyph code @var{glyph}.
6742 @end defun
6743
6744 @defun glyph-face glyph
6745 This function returns face of glyph code @var{glyph}, or @code{nil} if
6746 @var{glyph} uses the default face.
6747 @end defun
6748
6749 @ifnottex
6750 You can set up a @dfn{glyph table} to change how glyph codes are
6751 actually displayed on text terminals. This feature is semi-obsolete;
6752 use @code{glyphless-char-display} instead (@pxref{Glyphless Chars}).
6753
6754 @defvar glyph-table
6755 The value of this variable, if non-@code{nil}, is the current glyph
6756 table. It takes effect only on character terminals; on graphical
6757 displays, all glyphs are displayed literally. The glyph table should
6758 be a vector whose @var{g}th element specifies how to display glyph
6759 code @var{g}, where @var{g} is the glyph code for a glyph whose face
6760 is unspecified. Each element should be one of the following:
6761
6762 @table @asis
6763 @item @code{nil}
6764 Display this glyph literally.
6765
6766 @item a string
6767 Display this glyph by sending the specified string to the terminal.
6768
6769 @item a glyph code
6770 Display the specified glyph code instead.
6771 @end table
6772
6773 Any integer glyph code greater than or equal to the length of the
6774 glyph table is displayed literally.
6775 @end defvar
6776 @end ifnottex
6777
6778 @node Glyphless Chars
6779 @subsection Glyphless Character Display
6780 @cindex glyphless characters
6781
6782 @dfn{Glyphless characters} are characters which are displayed in a
6783 special way, e.g., as a box containing a hexadecimal code, instead of
6784 being displayed literally. These include characters which are
6785 explicitly defined to be glyphless, as well as characters for which
6786 there is no available font (on a graphical display), and characters
6787 which cannot be encoded by the terminal's coding system (on a text
6788 terminal).
6789
6790 @defvar glyphless-char-display
6791 The value of this variable is a char-table which defines glyphless
6792 characters and how they are displayed. Each entry must be one of the
6793 following display methods:
6794
6795 @table @asis
6796 @item @code{nil}
6797 Display the character in the usual way.
6798
6799 @item @code{zero-width}
6800 Don't display the character.
6801
6802 @item @code{thin-space}
6803 Display a thin space, 1-pixel wide on graphical displays, or
6804 1-character wide on text terminals.
6805
6806 @item @code{empty-box}
6807 Display an empty box.
6808
6809 @item @code{hex-code}
6810 Display a box containing the Unicode codepoint of the character, in
6811 hexadecimal notation.
6812
6813 @item an @acronym{ASCII} string
6814 Display a box containing that string. The string should contain at
6815 most 6 @acronym{ASCII} characters.
6816
6817 @item a cons cell @code{(@var{graphical} . @var{text})}
6818 Display with @var{graphical} on graphical displays, and with
6819 @var{text} on text terminals. Both @var{graphical} and @var{text}
6820 must be one of the display methods described above.
6821 @end table
6822
6823 @noindent
6824 The @code{thin-space}, @code{empty-box}, @code{hex-code}, and
6825 @acronym{ASCII} string display methods are drawn with the
6826 @code{glyphless-char} face. On text terminals, a box is emulated by
6827 square brackets, @samp{[]}.
6828
6829 The char-table has one extra slot, which determines how to display any
6830 character that cannot be displayed with any available font, or cannot
6831 be encoded by the terminal's coding system. Its value should be one
6832 of the above display methods, except @code{zero-width} or a cons cell.
6833
6834 If a character has a non-@code{nil} entry in an active display table,
6835 the display table takes effect; in this case, Emacs does not consult
6836 @code{glyphless-char-display} at all.
6837 @end defvar
6838
6839 @defopt glyphless-char-display-control
6840 This user option provides a convenient way to set
6841 @code{glyphless-char-display} for groups of similar characters. Do
6842 not set its value directly from Lisp code; the value takes effect only
6843 via a custom @code{:set} function (@pxref{Variable Definitions}),
6844 which updates @code{glyphless-char-display}.
6845
6846 Its value should be an alist of elements @code{(@var{group}
6847 . @var{method})}, where @var{group} is a symbol specifying a group of
6848 characters, and @var{method} is a symbol specifying how to display
6849 them.
6850
6851 @var{group} should be one of the following:
6852
6853 @table @code
6854 @item c0-control
6855 @acronym{ASCII} control characters @code{U+0000} to @code{U+001F},
6856 excluding the newline and tab characters (normally displayed as escape
6857 sequences like @samp{^A}; @pxref{Text Display,, How Text Is Displayed,
6858 emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}).
6859
6860 @item c1-control
6861 Non-@acronym{ASCII}, non-printing characters @code{U+0080} to
6862 @code{U+009F} (normally displayed as octal escape sequences like
6863 @samp{\230}).
6864
6865 @item format-control
6866 Characters of Unicode General Category [Cf], such as @samp{U+200E}
6867 (Left-to-Right Mark), but excluding characters that have graphic
6868 images, such as @samp{U+00AD} (Soft Hyphen).
6869
6870 @item no-font
6871 Characters for there is no suitable font, or which cannot be encoded
6872 by the terminal's coding system.
6873 @end table
6874
6875 @c FIXME: this can also be 'acronym', but that's not currently
6876 @c completely implemented; it applies only to the format-control
6877 @c group, and only works if the acronym is in 'char-acronym-table'.
6878 The @var{method} symbol should be one of @code{zero-width},
6879 @code{thin-space}, @code{empty-box}, or @code{hex-code}. These have
6880 the same meanings as in @code{glyphless-char-display}, above.
6881 @end defopt
6882
6883 @node Beeping
6884 @section Beeping
6885 @cindex bell
6886
6887 This section describes how to make Emacs ring the bell (or blink the
6888 screen) to attract the user's attention. Be conservative about how
6889 often you do this; frequent bells can become irritating. Also be
6890 careful not to use just beeping when signaling an error is more
6891 appropriate (@pxref{Errors}).
6892
6893 @defun ding &optional do-not-terminate
6894 @cindex keyboard macro termination
6895 This function beeps, or flashes the screen (see @code{visible-bell} below).
6896 It also terminates any keyboard macro currently executing unless
6897 @var{do-not-terminate} is non-@code{nil}.
6898 @end defun
6899
6900 @defun beep &optional do-not-terminate
6901 This is a synonym for @code{ding}.
6902 @end defun
6903
6904 @defopt visible-bell
6905 This variable determines whether Emacs should flash the screen to
6906 represent a bell. Non-@code{nil} means yes, @code{nil} means no.
6907 This is effective on graphical displays, and on text terminals
6908 provided the terminal's Termcap entry defines the visible bell
6909 capability (@samp{vb}).
6910 @end defopt
6911
6912 @defopt ring-bell-function
6913 If this is non-@code{nil}, it specifies how Emacs should ring the
6914 bell. Its value should be a function of no arguments. If this is
6915 non-@code{nil}, it takes precedence over the @code{visible-bell}
6916 variable.
6917 @end defopt
6918
6919 @node Window Systems
6920 @section Window Systems
6921
6922 Emacs works with several window systems, most notably the X Window
6923 System. Both Emacs and X use the term ``window'', but use it
6924 differently. An Emacs frame is a single window as far as X is
6925 concerned; the individual Emacs windows are not known to X at all.
6926
6927 @defvar window-system
6928 This terminal-local variable tells Lisp programs what window system
6929 Emacs is using for displaying the frame. The possible values are
6930
6931 @table @code
6932 @item x
6933 @cindex X Window System
6934 Emacs is displaying the frame using X.
6935 @item w32
6936 Emacs is displaying the frame using native MS-Windows GUI.
6937 @item ns
6938 Emacs is displaying the frame using the Nextstep interface (used on
6939 GNUstep and Mac OS X).
6940 @item pc
6941 Emacs is displaying the frame using MS-DOS direct screen writes.
6942 @item nil
6943 Emacs is displaying the frame on a character-based terminal.
6944 @end table
6945 @end defvar
6946
6947 @defvar initial-window-system
6948 This variable holds the value of @code{window-system} used for the
6949 first frame created by Emacs during startup. (When Emacs is invoked
6950 with the @option{--daemon} option, it does not create any initial
6951 frames, so @code{initial-window-system} is @code{nil}, except on
6952 MS-Windows, where it is still @code{w32}. @xref{Initial Options,
6953 daemon,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.)
6954 @end defvar
6955
6956 @defun window-system &optional frame
6957 This function returns a symbol whose name tells what window system is
6958 used for displaying @var{frame} (which defaults to the currently
6959 selected frame). The list of possible symbols it returns is the same
6960 one documented for the variable @code{window-system} above.
6961 @end defun
6962
6963 Do @emph{not} use @code{window-system} and
6964 @code{initial-window-system} as predicates or boolean flag variables,
6965 if you want to write code that works differently on text terminals and
6966 graphic displays. That is because @code{window-system} is not a good
6967 indicator of Emacs capabilities on a given display type. Instead, use
6968 @code{display-graphic-p} or any of the other @code{display-*-p}
6969 predicates described in @ref{Display Feature Testing}.
6970
6971 @node Bidirectional Display
6972 @section Bidirectional Display
6973 @cindex bidirectional display
6974 @cindex right-to-left text
6975
6976 Emacs can display text written in scripts, such as Arabic, Farsi,
6977 and Hebrew, whose natural ordering for horizontal text display runs
6978 from right to left. Furthermore, segments of Latin script and digits
6979 embedded in right-to-left text are displayed left-to-right, while
6980 segments of right-to-left script embedded in left-to-right text
6981 (e.g., Arabic or Hebrew text in comments or strings in a program
6982 source file) are appropriately displayed right-to-left. We call such
6983 mixtures of left-to-right and right-to-left text @dfn{bidirectional
6984 text}. This section describes the facilities and options for editing
6985 and displaying bidirectional text.
6986
6987 @cindex logical order
6988 @cindex reading order
6989 @cindex visual order
6990 @cindex unicode bidirectional algorithm
6991 @cindex UBA
6992 @cindex bidirectional reordering
6993 @cindex reordering, of bidirectional text
6994 Text is stored in Emacs buffers and strings in @dfn{logical} (or
6995 @dfn{reading}) order, i.e., the order in which a human would read
6996 each character. In right-to-left and bidirectional text, the order in
6997 which characters are displayed on the screen (called @dfn{visual
6998 order}) is not the same as logical order; the characters' screen
6999 positions do not increase monotonically with string or buffer
7000 position. In performing this @dfn{bidirectional reordering}, Emacs
7001 follows the Unicode Bidirectional Algorithm (a.k.a.@: @acronym{UBA}),
7002 which is described in Annex #9 of the Unicode standard
7003 (@url{http://www.unicode.org/reports/tr9/}). Emacs provides a ``Full
7004 Bidirectionality'' class implementation of the @acronym{UBA},
7005 consistent with the requirements of the Unicode Standard v8.0.
7006
7007 @defvar bidi-display-reordering
7008 If the value of this buffer-local variable is non-@code{nil} (the
7009 default), Emacs performs bidirectional reordering for display. The
7010 reordering affects buffer text, as well as display strings and overlay
7011 strings from text and overlay properties in the buffer (@pxref{Overlay
7012 Properties}, and @pxref{Display Property}). If the value is
7013 @code{nil}, Emacs does not perform bidirectional reordering in the
7014 buffer.
7015
7016 The default value of @code{bidi-display-reordering} controls the
7017 reordering of strings which are not directly supplied by a buffer,
7018 including the text displayed in mode lines (@pxref{Mode Line Format})
7019 and header lines (@pxref{Header Lines}).
7020 @end defvar
7021
7022 @cindex unibyte buffers, and bidi reordering
7023 Emacs never reorders the text of a unibyte buffer, even if
7024 @code{bidi-display-reordering} is non-@code{nil} in the buffer. This
7025 is because unibyte buffers contain raw bytes, not characters, and thus
7026 lack the directionality properties required for reordering.
7027 Therefore, to test whether text in a buffer will be reordered for
7028 display, it is not enough to test the value of
7029 @code{bidi-display-reordering} alone. The correct test is this:
7030
7031 @example
7032 (if (and enable-multibyte-characters
7033 bidi-display-reordering)
7034 ;; Buffer is being reordered for display
7035 )
7036 @end example
7037
7038 However, unibyte display and overlay strings @emph{are} reordered if
7039 their parent buffer is reordered. This is because plain-@sc{ascii}
7040 strings are stored by Emacs as unibyte strings. If a unibyte display
7041 or overlay string includes non-@sc{ascii} characters, these characters
7042 are assumed to have left-to-right direction.
7043
7044 @cindex display properties, and bidi reordering of text
7045 Text covered by @code{display} text properties, by overlays with
7046 @code{display} properties whose value is a string, and by any other
7047 properties that replace buffer text, is treated as a single unit when
7048 it is reordered for display. That is, the entire chunk of text
7049 covered by these properties is reordered together. Moreover, the
7050 bidirectional properties of the characters in such a chunk of text are
7051 ignored, and Emacs reorders them as if they were replaced with a
7052 single character @code{U+FFFC}, known as the @dfn{Object Replacement
7053 Character}. This means that placing a display property over a portion
7054 of text may change the way that the surrounding text is reordered for
7055 display. To prevent this unexpected effect, always place such
7056 properties on text whose directionality is identical with text that
7057 surrounds it.
7058
7059 @cindex base direction of a paragraph
7060 Each paragraph of bidirectional text has a @dfn{base direction},
7061 either right-to-left or left-to-right. Left-to-right paragraphs are
7062 displayed beginning at the left margin of the window, and are
7063 truncated or continued when the text reaches the right margin.
7064 Right-to-left paragraphs are displayed beginning at the right margin,
7065 and are continued or truncated at the left margin.
7066
7067 By default, Emacs determines the base direction of each paragraph by
7068 looking at the text at its beginning. The precise method of
7069 determining the base direction is specified by the @acronym{UBA}; in a
7070 nutshell, the first character in a paragraph that has an explicit
7071 directionality determines the base direction of the paragraph.
7072 However, sometimes a buffer may need to force a certain base direction
7073 for its paragraphs. For example, buffers containing program source
7074 code should force all paragraphs to be displayed left-to-right. You
7075 can use following variable to do this:
7076
7077 @defvar bidi-paragraph-direction
7078 If the value of this buffer-local variable is the symbol
7079 @code{right-to-left} or @code{left-to-right}, all paragraphs in the
7080 buffer are assumed to have that specified direction. Any other value
7081 is equivalent to @code{nil} (the default), which means to determine
7082 the base direction of each paragraph from its contents.
7083
7084 @cindex @code{prog-mode}, and @code{bidi-paragraph-direction}
7085 Modes for program source code should set this to @code{left-to-right}.
7086 Prog mode does this by default, so modes derived from Prog mode do not
7087 need to set this explicitly (@pxref{Basic Major Modes}).
7088 @end defvar
7089
7090 @defun current-bidi-paragraph-direction &optional buffer
7091 This function returns the paragraph direction at point in the named
7092 @var{buffer}. The returned value is a symbol, either
7093 @code{left-to-right} or @code{right-to-left}. If @var{buffer} is
7094 omitted or @code{nil}, it defaults to the current buffer. If the
7095 buffer-local value of the variable @code{bidi-paragraph-direction} is
7096 non-@code{nil}, the returned value will be identical to that value;
7097 otherwise, the returned value reflects the paragraph direction
7098 determined dynamically by Emacs. For buffers whose value of
7099 @code{bidi-display-reordering} is @code{nil} as well as unibyte
7100 buffers, this function always returns @code{left-to-right}.
7101 @end defun
7102
7103 @cindex visual-order cursor motion
7104 Sometimes there's a need to move point in strict visual order,
7105 either to the left or to the right of its current screen position.
7106 Emacs provides a primitive to do that.
7107
7108 @defun move-point-visually direction
7109 This function moves point of the currently selected window to the
7110 buffer position that appears immediately to the right or to the left
7111 of point on the screen. If @var{direction} is positive, point will
7112 move one screen position to the right, otherwise it will move one
7113 screen position to the left. Note that, depending on the surrounding
7114 bidirectional context, this could potentially move point many buffer
7115 positions away. If invoked at the end of a screen line, the function
7116 moves point to the rightmost or leftmost screen position of the next
7117 or previous screen line, as appropriate for the value of
7118 @var{direction}.
7119
7120 The function returns the new buffer position as its value.
7121 @end defun
7122
7123 @cindex layout on display, and bidirectional text
7124 @cindex jumbled display of bidirectional text
7125 @cindex concatenating bidirectional strings
7126 Bidirectional reordering can have surprising and unpleasant effects
7127 when two strings with bidirectional content are juxtaposed in a
7128 buffer, or otherwise programmatically concatenated into a string of
7129 text. A typical problematic case is when a buffer consists of
7130 sequences of text fields separated by whitespace or punctuation
7131 characters, like Buffer Menu mode or Rmail Summary Mode. Because the
7132 punctuation characters used as separators have @dfn{weak
7133 directionality}, they take on the directionality of surrounding text.
7134 As result, a numeric field that follows a field with bidirectional
7135 content can be displayed @emph{to the left} of the preceding field,
7136 messing up the expected layout. There are several ways to avoid this
7137 problem:
7138
7139 @itemize @minus
7140 @item
7141 Append the special character @code{U+200E}, LEFT-TO-RIGHT MARK, or
7142 @acronym{LRM}, to the end of each field that may have bidirectional
7143 content, or prepend it to the beginning of the following field. The
7144 function @code{bidi-string-mark-left-to-right}, described below, comes
7145 in handy for this purpose. (In a right-to-left paragraph, use
7146 @code{U+200F}, RIGHT-TO-LEFT MARK, or @acronym{RLM}, instead.) This
7147 is one of the solutions recommended by the UBA.
7148
7149 @item
7150 Include the tab character in the field separator. The tab character
7151 plays the role of @dfn{segment separator} in bidirectional reordering,
7152 causing the text on either side to be reordered separately.
7153
7154 @cindex @code{space} display spec, and bidirectional text
7155 @item
7156 Separate fields with a @code{display} property or overlay with a
7157 property value of the form @code{(space . PROPS)} (@pxref{Specified
7158 Space}). Emacs treats this display specification as a @dfn{paragraph
7159 separator}, and reorders the text on either side separately.
7160 @end itemize
7161
7162 @defun bidi-string-mark-left-to-right string
7163 This function returns its argument @var{string}, possibly modified,
7164 such that the result can be safely concatenated with another string,
7165 or juxtaposed with another string in a buffer, without disrupting the
7166 relative layout of this string and the next one on display. If the
7167 string returned by this function is displayed as part of a
7168 left-to-right paragraph, it will always appear on display to the left
7169 of the text that follows it. The function works by examining the
7170 characters of its argument, and if any of those characters could cause
7171 reordering on display, the function appends the @acronym{LRM}
7172 character to the string. The appended @acronym{LRM} character is made
7173 invisible by giving it an @code{invisible} text property of @code{t}
7174 (@pxref{Invisible Text}).
7175 @end defun
7176
7177 The reordering algorithm uses the bidirectional properties of the
7178 characters stored as their @code{bidi-class} property
7179 (@pxref{Character Properties}). Lisp programs can change these
7180 properties by calling the @code{put-char-code-property} function.
7181 However, doing this requires a thorough understanding of the
7182 @acronym{UBA}, and is therefore not recommended. Any changes to the
7183 bidirectional properties of a character have global effect: they
7184 affect all Emacs frames and windows.
7185
7186 Similarly, the @code{mirroring} property is used to display the
7187 appropriate mirrored character in the reordered text. Lisp programs
7188 can affect the mirrored display by changing this property. Again, any
7189 such changes affect all of Emacs display.
7190
7191 @cindex overriding bidirectional properties
7192 @cindex directional overrides
7193 @cindex LRO
7194 @cindex RLO
7195 The bidirectional properties of characters can be overridden by
7196 inserting into the text special directional control characters,
7197 LEFT-TO-RIGHT OVERRIDE (@acronym{LRO}) and RIGHT-TO-LEFT OVERRIDE
7198 (@acronym{RLO}). Any characters between a @acronym{RLO} and the
7199 following newline or POP DIRECTIONAL FORMATTING (@acronym{PDF})
7200 control character, whichever comes first, will be displayed as if they
7201 were strong right-to-left characters, i.e.@: they will be reversed on
7202 display. Similarly, any characters between @acronym{LRO} and
7203 @acronym{PDF} or newline will display as if they were strong
7204 left-to-right, and will @emph{not} be reversed even if they are strong
7205 right-to-left characters.
7206
7207 @cindex phishing using directional overrides
7208 @cindex malicious use of directional overrides
7209 These overrides are useful when you want to make some text
7210 unaffected by the reordering algorithm, and instead directly control
7211 the display order. But they can also be used for malicious purposes,
7212 known as @dfn{phishing}. Specifically, a URL on a Web page or a link
7213 in an email message can be manipulated to make its visual appearance
7214 unrecognizable, or similar to some popular benign location, while the
7215 real location, interpreted by a browser in the logical order, is very
7216 different.
7217
7218 Emacs provides a primitive that applications can use to detect
7219 instances of text whose bidirectional properties were overridden so as
7220 to make a left-to-right character display as if it were a
7221 right-to-left character, or vise versa.
7222
7223 @defun bidi-find-overridden-directionality from to &optional object
7224 This function looks at the text of the specified @var{object} between
7225 positions @var{from} (inclusive) and @var{to} (exclusive), and returns
7226 the first position where it finds a strong left-to-right character
7227 whose directional properties were forced to display the character as
7228 right-to-left, or for a strong right-to-left character that was forced
7229 to display as left-to-right. If it finds no such characters in the
7230 specified region of text, it returns @code{nil}.
7231
7232 The optional argument @var{object} specifies which text to search, and
7233 defaults to the current buffer. If @var{object} is non-@code{nil}, it
7234 can be some other buffer, or it can be a string or a window. If it is
7235 a string, the function searches that string. If it is a window, the
7236 function searches the buffer displayed in that window. If a buffer
7237 whose text you want to examine is displayed in some window, we
7238 recommend to specify it by that window, rather than pass the buffer to
7239 the function. This is because telling the function about the window
7240 allows it to correctly account for window-specific overlays, which
7241 might change the result of the function if some text in the buffer is
7242 covered by overlays.
7243 @end defun
7244
7245 @cindex copying bidirectional text, preserve visual order
7246 @cindex visual order, preserve when copying bidirectional text
7247 When text that includes mixed right-to-left and left-to-right
7248 characters and bidirectional controls is copied into a different
7249 location, it can change its visual appearance, and also can affect the
7250 visual appearance of the surrounding text at destination. This is
7251 because reordering of bidirectional text specified by the
7252 @acronym{UBA} has non-trivial context-dependent effects both on the
7253 copied text and on the text at copy destination that will surround it.
7254
7255 Sometimes, a Lisp program may need to preserve the exact visual
7256 appearance of the copied text at destination, and of the text that
7257 surrounds the copy. Lisp programs can use the following function to
7258 achieve that effect.
7259
7260 @defun buffer-substring-with-bidi-context start end &optional no-properties
7261 This function works similar to @code{buffer-substring} (@pxref{Buffer
7262 Contents}), but it prepends and appends to the copied text bidi
7263 directional control characters necessary to preserve the visual
7264 appearance of the text when it is inserted at another place. Optional
7265 argument @var{no-properties}, if non-@code{nil}, means remove the text
7266 properties from the copy of the text.
7267 @end defun